Mercedes C230 Operators Manual

Operator’s Manual
C-Class Sedan
This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Ê4CtQr7Ë2035844982
Order No. 6515 0135 13 Part No. 203 584 49 82 USA Edition A 2005

C 230 Kompressor Sport
C 240
C 240 4MATIC
C 320
C 320 4MATIC
C 320 Sport
C 55 AMG

Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your signed to acquaint you with the opera-
desire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started ................................... 31

Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 22 Unlocking ............................................. 32
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 32
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26 Starter switch positions.................. 33
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 27 Adjusting .............................................. 35
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 27 Seats .............................................. 35
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 28 Steering wheel................................ 39
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 29 Mirrors............................................ 41
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 30 Driving.................................................. 43
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belt ................... 43
Operating your vehicle outside Starting the engine ......................... 46
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Switching on headlamps................. 49
Where to find it.................................... 14 Turn signals .................................... 50
Symbols............................................... 15 Windshield wipers........................... 51
Operating safety .................................. 16 Problems while driving.................... 53
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Parking and locking.............................. 54
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Parking brake ................................. 54
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Switching off headlamps................. 55
Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18 Turning off engine........................... 56
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19

Contents
Lighting ............................................. 109

Safety and Security ........................... 57 Controls in detail ............................... 87 Exterior lamp switch .................... 109
Occupant safety................................... 58 Locking and unlocking ......................... 88 Combination switch ..................... 113
Air bags .......................................... 59 SmartKey ....................................... 88 Hazard warning flasher ................ 114
Seat belts ....................................... 64 Opening the doors from Interior lighting ............................ 115
Children in the vehicle.................... 67 the inside ....................................... 92 Door entry lamps ......................... 116
Blocking of rear door window Opening the trunk .......................... 92 Trunk lamp................................... 116
operation........................................ 75 Closing the trunk............................ 94 Instrument cluster ............................. 117
Panic alarm* ........................................ 76 Trunk lid emergency release .......... 95 Instrument cluster illumination .... 117
Activating ....................................... 76 Automatic central locking .............. 96 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 118
Deactivating ................................... 76 Locking and unlocking from Trip odometer .............................. 119
Driving safety systems......................... 77 the inside ....................................... 96 Tachometer.................................. 119
ABS ................................................ 77 Seats ................................................... 98 Outside temperature indicator ..... 119
BAS ................................................ 78 Easy-entry/exit feature* ................ 98 Control system .................................. 121
ESP................................................. 79 Removing and installing front Multifunction display.................... 121
Four wheel electronic traction seat head restraints ....................... 99 Multifunction steering wheel........ 122
system (4MATIC) with the ESP ....... 82 Rear seat head restraints ............. 101 Menus .......................................... 124
Anti-theft systems................................ 83 Multicontour seats* ..................... 104 Standard display menu ................ 126
Immobilizer..................................... 83 Seat heating*............................... 105 AUDIO menu ................................ 127
Anti-theft alarm system* ................ 83 Memory function* ............................. 106 NAV* menu.................................. 130
Tow-away alarm* ........................... 85 Storing positions into memory ..... 107 Vehicle status message memory
Recalling positions from memory . 107 menu............................................ 130
Storing exterior rear view mirror Settings menu.............................. 132
parking position ........................... 108 Trip computer menu..................... 148
TEL menu* ................................... 150

Contents
Manual transmission ......................... 154 Climate control................................... 174 Power windows .................................. 223
Shifting into reverse..................... 155 Deactivating the climate control Opening and closing the
Automatic transmission*................... 156 system .......................................... 177 windows........................................ 223
One-touch gearshifting................. 158 Setting the temperature................ 177 Synchronizing power windows...... 226
Gear ranges ................................. 159 Adjusting air distribution and Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................ 227
Gear selector lever position ......... 160 volume .......................................... 178 Opening and closing the power
Automatic shift program .............. 162 Defrosting ..................................... 178 tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 227
Driving tips................................... 163 Air recirculation mode .................. 179 Synchronizing the power
Steering wheel gearshift control Air conditioning............................. 181 tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 230
(Speedshift) (C 55 AMG only)....... 164 Rear passenger compartment Driving systems.................................. 231
Manual shift program adjustable air vents....................... 182 Cruise control ............................... 231
(C 55 AMG only)........................... 165 Audio system...................................... 183 Loading .............................................. 234
Emergency operation Audio and telephone, operation.... 183 Roof rack* .................................... 234
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 167 Operating safety ........................... 183 Ski sack* (Canada only) ............... 234
Good visibility .................................... 168 Operating and display elements.... 184 Split rear bench seat* .................. 237
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 168 Button and soft key operation....... 186 Loading instructions ..................... 239
Rear view mirrors......................... 168 Operation...................................... 186 Cargo tie-down rings*................... 240
Sun visors .................................... 171 Radio operation ............................ 191 Useful features................................... 241
Rear window sunshade* .............. 172 Introduction to satellite radio* Storage compartments ................. 241
Rear window defroster ................. 173 (USA only)..................................... 196 Ashtrays........................................ 245
CD mode....................................... 201 Cigarette lighter............................ 246
GSM network phones ................... 208 Electrical outlet in the rear
TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 214 passenger compartment............... 247
Emergency calls “911”.................. 221 Telephone* ................................... 247
Tele Aid*....................................... 248
Garage door opener*.................... 256

Contents
At the gas station .............................. 275 Winter driving .................................... 290

Operation ......................................... 263 Refueling ...................................... 275 Winter tires .................................. 290
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 264 Check regularly and before Block heater (Canada only) .......... 291
Driving instructions............................ 265 a long trip..................................... 277 Snow chains................................. 291
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 265 Engine compartment ......................... 278 Maintenance...................................... 292
Drinking and driving ..................... 265 Hood ............................................ 278 Clearing the maintenance
Pedals .......................................... 265 Engine oil ..................................... 279 service indicator .......................... 293
Power assistance ......................... 265 Transmission fluid level ................ 282 Maintenance service term
Brakes .......................................... 266 Coolant level ................................ 283 exceeded ..................................... 293
Driving off..................................... 267 Battery ......................................... 284 Calling up the maintenance
Parking ......................................... 267 Windshield washer system and service indicator .......................... 293
Tires ............................................. 268 headlamp cleaning system*......... 285 Resetting the maintenance
Hydroplaning ................................ 268 Tires and wheels................................ 286 service indicator .......................... 294
Tire traction.................................. 269 Important guidelines .................... 286 Vehicle care....................................... 295
Tire speed rating .......................... 269 Life of tire..................................... 287 Cleaning and care of the
Winter driving instructions ........... 270 Direction of rotation..................... 287 vehicle ......................................... 295
Standing water ............................. 271 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 287
Passenger compartment .............. 272 Rotating tires ............................... 289
Driving abroad.............................. 272
Control and operation of radio
transmitters.................................. 272
Catalytic converter ....................... 273
Emission control........................... 273
Coolant temperature .................... 274

Contents
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 342 Jump starting...................................... 363

Practical hints ................................ 301 SmartKey ...................................... 343 Towing the vehicle.............................. 365
What to do if … .................................. 302 Replacing bulbs .................................. 344 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 368
Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 302 Bulbs............................................. 344 Fuses.................................................. 369
Lamp in center console................ 308 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 347 Aids for changing fuses ................ 369
Vehicle status messages in the Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 351 Main fuse box in passenger
multifunction display.................... 309 Replacing wiper blades....................... 352 compartment ................................ 370
Where will I find ...? ........................... 329 Removing wiper blades ................. 352 Fuse box in engine
First aid kit................................... 329 Installing wiper blades .................. 352 compartment ................................ 370
Vehicle tool kit ............................. 329 Flat tire............................................... 353 Fuse box in trunk .......................... 371
Minispare wheel Preparing the vehicle .................... 353
(except C 55 AMG)....................... 333 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 353
Collapsible tire Battery................................................ 360
(C 55 AMG only)........................... 334 Disconnecting the battery............. 361
Spare wheel bolts ........................ 336 Removing the battery.................... 361
Unlocking/locking in an emergency.. 337 Charging and reinstalling
Unlocking the vehicle................... 337 the battery .................................... 361
Locking the vehicle ...................... 338 Reconnecting the battery.............. 362
Fuel filler flap ............................... 339
Manually unlocking the
transmission gear selector lever .. 340
Opening/closing in an emergency..... 341
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* .......... 341

Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 387

Technical data.................................. 373 Capacities .................................... 387 Technical terms............................... 399
Parts service ...................................... 374 Engine oils.................................... 390
Warranty coverage............................. 375 Engine oil additives ...................... 390
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 390 Index................................................. 405
Information Booklet...................... 375 Brake fluid.................................... 390
Identification labels............................ 376 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 391
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 377 Fuel requirements ........................ 391
C 230 Kompressor (all models) .... 377 Gasoline additives ........................ 392
C 240 (all models)/ Flexible Fuel Vehicles................... 392
C 320 (all models)/ Coolants....................................... 394
C 55 AMG..................................... 377 Windshield washer and
Engine................................................ 378 headlamp cleaning system*......... 396
Rims and Tires ................................... 380 Consumer information ....................... 397
Same size tires ............................. 381 Uniform tire quality grading ......... 397
Mixed size tires ............................ 382
Minispare wheel ........................... 383
Collapsible tire
(C 55 AMG only) ........................... 383
Electrical system................................ 384
Main dimensions................................ 385
Weights.............................................. 386

Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies you will receive comprehensive informa-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, cations, and where proper installation will
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Car Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your care and operating procedures. The
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- Booklet are important documents and
dures. should be kept with the vehicle.
10

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should be sent to us,
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
Customer Assistance Center,
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- One Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than NJ 07645-0350.
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory-trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to your au- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser- 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
vice. The service advisor will record each
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
service in the booklet for you.
Customer Assistance Representatives is in your own interest that we can contact
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. you should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
Program Brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13

Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-

vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color so you can find about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
information quickly. cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
driver’s seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14

Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
indicate cross-references to
term definitions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
15

Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle

Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are may cause serious damage and impair the
interconnected, any modifications made operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
may produce an undesired effect on other sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
systems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety
down, and drive with caution to an area standards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the facility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
never turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
16

Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
17

Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
18

Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19

20

At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
21

At a glance
Cockpit
22

At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Steering wheel gearshift 164 8 Glove box lid release 241 h Door control panel 30
control (C 55 AMG only) 9 Glove box lock 241 j Parking brake release 48
2 Cruise control lever 231 a Center console 27 k Combination switch
3 Multifunction steering 26, b Starter switch 33 앫 Turn signals 50
wheel 122
c Hood lock release 278 앫 Windshield wipers 51
4 Horn
d Steering wheel adjustment 40 앫 High beam 50
5 Instrument cluster 24, handle (manual)
117 l Exterior lamp switch 49,
e Steering wheel adjustment 40 109
6 Lever for voice control stalk (electrical)*
system*1, see separate m Exterior rear view mirror 41,
operating instructions f Parking brake pedal 48, 54 adjustment 108
7 Overhead control panel 29 g Remote trunk lid switch 93 n Headlamp washer switch* 168
1 Feature description is based on preliminary infor-
mation at time of printing. At time of printing, no
date for availability of voice control had been set.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details and availability for your vehicle model.
23

At a glance
Instrument cluster
24

At a glance
Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer with: Program mode 121, < Seat belt telltale 64,
v Electronic Stability 79, 162, 307
Program (ESP) 306 165 A High beam head- 50,
warning lamp Status indicator (outside 119, lamp indicator lamp 113
; Brake warning 48, temperature/digital 136 6 Fuel gauge with:
lamp, USA only 54, speedometer
Fuel reserve warning lamp 307
303 Digital clock 121
4 Fuel filler cap
3 Brake warning 48, 4 K Right turn signal 50 location indicator:
lamp, Canada only 54, indicator lamp The fuel filler cap is
303 5 Tachometer with: 119 on the rear
B Low beam head- 49, - Antilock Brake 77, right-hand side.
lamp indicator lamp 109 System (ABS) 302 7 Coolant temperature 118
2 L Left turn signal 50 indicator lamp gauge
indicator lamp ú Engine malfunction 304, 8 Reset button for: 117
3 Multifunction display 121 indicator lamp, 305 앫 Resetting trip 119
with: USA only odometer
Trip odometer 119 ± Engine malfunction 304, 앫 Resetting individual 133
Main odometer 121 indicator lamp, 305 settings
Canada only
Gear selector lever 47, 앫 Instrument cluster 117
position 121, 1 Supplemental 58, illumination
160 restraint system 307
indicator lamp
25

At a glance
Item Page Item Page

1 Multifunction display 121 4 Menu systems:
Operating control 122 Press button
system è for next menu
2 Selecting the submenu or ÿ for previous menu
setting the volume: 5 Moving within a menu:
Press button Press button
æ up/to increase j for next display
ç down/to decrease k for previous display
3 Telephone*:
Press button i
s to take a call C 230 Kompressor Sport, and
t to end a call C 320 Sport:
Steering wheel in these vehicles will
vary from steering wheel shown.
However, multifunction steering wheel
symbols and feature description apply
to Sport models as well.
26

At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Seat heating*, driver’s side 105 8 Seat heating*, passenger 105
2 Rear window sunshade 172 side
switch* 9 Front passenger front 70,
3 ESP control switch 79 air bag off indicator lamp 308
4 Hazard warning flasher 114 a Audio system, 183

switch – switching on/off or
5 Central locking switch 96 COMAND* (see separate
Central unlocking switch 96 operating instructions)
6 Switch for folding back 102 b Climate control 174

rear seat head restraints Rear window defroster 173
7 Tow-away alarm switch* 85
Anti-theft alarm system 84
indicator lamp*
27

At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page

1 Ashtray 245
Cigarette lighter 246
2 Gear selector lever for 47,
automatic transmission* 160
Gearshift lever for manual 46,
transmission 154
3 Cup holders 243
4 Armrest 242
5 Program mode selector
switch for automatic
transmission*
앫 Automatic shift 162
program
앫 Manual shift program 165
(C 55 AMG only)
28

At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Rear interior lighting 116 6 Interior rear view mirror 41,
on/off 168
2 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 227 7 Garage door opener* 256
3 Right reading lamp on/off 116 8 Left reading lamp on/off 116
4 Interior lighting control 115 9 Tele Aid* (emergency call 248
5 Hands-free microphone for 150, system) button
Tele Aid* (emergency call 208,
system), telephone* and 248
voice control system*
(see separate operating
instructions)
29

At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Door handle 92
2 Memory function* (for 106
storing seat, exterior
mirror and steering wheel
settings)
3 Switches for seat 35, 98
adjustment*
4 Switches for 223
opening/closing front door
windows
5 Switch for rear door 75
window override
6 Switches for 223
opening/closing rear door
windows
7 Remote trunk lid switch 93
30

Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
31

Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey i

overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- Canada only:
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners Only vehicles equipped with an
should pay special attention to the infor- anti-theft alarm system* have
mation given here. SmartKeys with integrated panic
If you are already familiar with the basic button* 4.
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
information. The corresponding page SmartKey.
references are located at the end of each
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
segment.
locking knobs in the doors move up.
SmartKey with remote control
왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey in the starter switch.
2 Š Opening button for the trunk lid
3 Œ Unlock button For more information, see “Locking and
4 Â Panic button* (컄 page 76) unlocking” (컄 page 88).
32

Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions SmartKey 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position.
All lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning! G come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition is switched on, have it checked
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend- the instrument cluster remains on after
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un- starting the engine or comes on while
locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
equipment may cause an accident and/or cluster” (컄 page 302).
serious personal injury. Starter switch 3 Starting position
0 For removing SmartKey
The steering is locked when the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch. If necessary, move steering
wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage.
1 Power supply to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment
33

Getting started
Unlocking
i !
When you switch on the ignition, the If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
indicator and warning lamps in the starter switch, the battery may not be
instrument cluster come on. This indi- sufficiently charged.
cates that the respective systems are 앫 Check the battery and charge it if
operational. They should go out when necessary (컄 page 360).
the engine is running.
앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 363).
i To prevent accelerated battery
Vehicles with automatic transmission: discharge and a possible dead battery,
The SmartKey can only be removed always remove the SmartKey from the
from the starter switch with the gear starter switch when the engine is not in
selector lever in position P. operation.
34

Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning! G That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

The seat back and seat belts provide the
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly Children 12 years old and under must never
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- upright position and belts are properly posi- ride in the front seat, except in a
tening of seat belts, must be done before tioned on the body. Your seat must be ad- Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
the vehicle is put into motion. justed so that you can correctly fasten your compatible child seat, which operates with
seat belt (컄 page 43). the BabySmartTM system installed in the
Seats Never place hands under the seat or near vehicle to deactivate the passenger front
any moving parts while a seat is being ad- air bag when it is properly installed. Other-
The seats can be adjusted either manually justed. wise they will be struck by the air bag when
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
equipment. or fatal injury will result.
Warning! G According to accident statistics, children
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. ing positions. Infants and small children
your vehicle.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause must ride in back seats and be seated in an
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey removed from the appropriate infant or child restraint system,
starter switch, the power seats* can be which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat operated when the respective door is open. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
back in an excessively reclined position as Therefore, do not leave children unattended lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
this can be dangerous. You could slide unin the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked accordance with the child seat manufactur-
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- er’s instructions. 컄컄
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- ment may cause an accident and/or serious 1
domen or neck. BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
personal injury.
Automotive Corp.
35

Getting started
Adjusting
컄컄 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints 왘 Lift handle 1. 왘 Turn handwheel 2 forward or back-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and ward until your upper legs are lightly
왘 Slide seat to the desired position.
the child is not properly secured in the child supported
restraint. 왘 Allow handle 1 to reengage.
왘 Check for proper engagement before Seat backrest tilt
Manual seat adjustment driving. 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating 왘 Press switch 3 in direction of arrow
position that still allows you to reach the until your arms are slightly angled
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi- when holding the steering wheel.
tion should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate Seat height
controls.
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).
! 왘 Press switch 4 in direction of arrow
When moving the seat, make sure that until your legs are lightly supported.
there are no items in the footwell or
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment behind the seat. Otherwise you could
2 Seat cushion tilt damage the seat.
3 Seat backrest tilt
4 Seat height
36

Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height Head restraint tilt

Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
1 Release button head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Manually adjust the angle of the head
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
restraint.
Raising:
dent. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the
왘 Manually adjust the height of the head
head restraint cushion.
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
i For more information, see “Seats”
Adjust the head restraint in such a way (컄 page 98).
왘 To lower head the restraint, push that it is as close to the head as
release button 1 and push down on possible.
the head restraint.
37

Getting started
Adjusting
Power seat* adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt
The seat adjustment switches are located 왘 Press switch forward or backward in 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
in each front door. direction of arrow 4. arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
Seat backrest tilt
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-
tion should be as far rearward as possible, 왘 Press switch forward or backward in
consistent with ability to properly operate direction of arrow 5 until your arms
controls. are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
!
When moving the seat, make sure that Seat height
there are no items in the footwell or
1 Head restraint height 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
behind the seat. Otherwise you could
2 Seat height arrow 2.
damage the seat.
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment Head restraint height
5 Seat backrest tilt
i
왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
The memory function* (컄 page 106)
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). arrow 1.
lets you store the setting for the seat
or position together with the settings for i
the steering wheel and exterior rear Adjust the head restraint in such a way
왘 Open the respective door.
view mirrors. that it is as close to the head as
possible.
38

Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt Steering wheel

Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly Warning! G
Adjust head restraint so that the center of Do not adjust the steering wheel while
the head restraint supports the back of the driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- driving, or driving without the adjustment
tial for injury to the head and neck in the locked could cause the driver to lose control
event of an accident or similar situation. of the vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
head restraints. Head restraints are
Manually adjust the angle of the head SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
intended to help reduce injuries during an
restraint. your vehicle.
accident. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the Even with the SmartKey removed from the
head restraint cushion. starter switch, the electrical steering wheel
For more information, see “Seats” adjustment feature* can be operated when
(컄 page 98). the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
39

Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment, manual 왘 Make sure the steering wheel is Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*
securely locked by trying to move it up
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
and down, and in and out before driving
located on the steering column (lower left).
off.
Warning! G
Only adjust the steering wheel with the
vehicle at a standstill and make sure the
steering wheel is securely locked in place
before driving off.
1 Handle
Driving without the steering wheel adjust-
왘 To unlock the steering column, pull ment locked may cause an unexpected
handle 1 out to its stop limit. steering wheel movement which could 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
왘 Move steering wheel to the desired cause the driver to lose control of the 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
position. vehicle. Make sure the steering wheel is 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).
securely locked by trying to move it up and
왘 To lock the steering column, push down, and in and out before driving off. or
handle 1 all the way in until it
왘 Open the driver’s door.
engages.
The steering wheel is once again
locked into position.
40

Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting steering column in or out Mirrors Exterior rear view mirrors

왘 Move stalk forward or back in the
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
direction of arrow 1 until a comfort-
mirrors before driving so that you have a Warning! G
able steering wheel position is reached
good view of the road and traffic condi-
with your arms slightly bent at the Exercise care when using the passen-
tions.
elbow. ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
Adjusting steering column up or down Warning! G for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
왘 Move stalk up or down in the direction In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte terior rear view mirror or glance over your
of arrow 2. may escape the mirror housing if the mirror shoulder before changing lanes.
Make sure your legs can move freely glass breaks.
and that all the displays (incl. malfunc- Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru-
!
low the liquid to come into contact with Electrolyte drops coming into contact
ment cluster are clearly visible. eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. with the vehicle paint finish can only be
In case it does, immediately flush affected
i completely removed while in their
area with water, and seek medical help if liquid state and by applying plenty of
The memory function* (컄 page 106)
necessary. water.
lets you store the setting for the
steering wheel together with the
settings for the seat position and Interior rear view mirror
exterior rear view mirrors. 왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
rors” (컄 page 168).
41

Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located above the exterior 왘 Press button 3 for the driver’s side i
lamp switch. exterior rear view mirror or button 2 The memory function* (컄 page 106)
for passenger-side exterior rear view lets you store the setting for the
mirror. exterior rear view mirrors together with
왘 Push adjustment button 1 up, down, the settings for the steering wheel and
left, or right according to the desired seat position.
setting.
!
i
At low ambient temperatures, the
If an exterior rear view mirror was
exterior rear view mirrors will be
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
heated automatically.
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
1 Adjustment button from the front), reposition it by
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view applying firm pressure until it snaps For more information, see “Rear view mir-
mirror button into place. The mirror housing is now rors” (컄 page 168).
3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror properly positioned and you can adjust
button the mirror normally.
42

Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Children 12 years old and under must never
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in accident. You and your passengers should ride in the front seat, except in a
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- always wear seat belts. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
ance for the pedals. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries compatible child seat, which operates with
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers can be considerably more severe without the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
the objects could get caught between the your seat belt properly buckled. Without hicle to deactivate the passenger front
pedals. You could then no longer brake or your seat belt buckled, you are much more air bag when it is properly installed. Other-
accelerate. likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be wise they will be struck by the air bag when
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or killed. or fatal injury will result.
Fastening the seat belt
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or According to accident statistics, children
death is lessened if you are wearing your are safer when properly restrained in the
Warning! G seat belt. The air bags can only provide the rear seating positions than in the front seat-
protection they were designed to afford if ing positions. Infants and small children
Always fasten your seat belt before driving the occupants are using their seat belts must ride in back seats and be seated in an
off. Always make sure your passengers are (컄 page 64). appropriate infant or child restraint system,
properly restrained, even those sitting in the which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
rear and pregnant women. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions. 컄컄
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
43

Getting started
Driving
컄컄
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
Warning! G
are not properly secured in the vehicle and Never let more people ride in the vehicle
the child is not properly secured in the child than there are seat belts available. Be sure
restraint. everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
Warning! G a time.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat

backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
Warning! G
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
Read and observe the additional warning no-
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
domen or neck. That could cause serious or 1 Latch plate
section (컄 page 62) and (컄 page 64).
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and 2 Release button
seat belt provide the best restraint when the 3 Buckle
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body. 왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from the belt outlet.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘 Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
44

Getting started
Driving
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to Proper use of seat belts 앫 Check your seat belt during travel to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion make sure that it is properly posi-
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening.
up. tioned.
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
앫 Make sure that the seat belt is always
Seat belt height adjustment portion is located as close as possible
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is when wearing loose clothing.
not touch the neck). Never pass the
located as close as possible to the middle
shoulder portion of the belt under your
of your shoulder (it should not touch the
neck or pass under the arm).
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust Warning! G
the height of the belt outlet.
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
Front seats 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
could tear.
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen. Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly
This could damage the belt.
upright position.
Never attempt to make modifications to
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one seat belts. This could impair the effective-
person at a time. ness of the belts.
앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
person and another object at the same severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
time. When using a seat belt to secure not be able to provide adequate protection.
4 Button for belt outlet height adjust- infant or toddler restraints or children
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
ment in booster seats, always follow the
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
왘 Press button 4 and slide belt outlet Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
upward or downward. Center.
45

Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Manual transmission Starting

왘 Depress brake pedal.
Warning! G 왘 Make sure the gearshift lever is in
neutral position (no gear selected).
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
왘 Fully depress clutch pedal.
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- Otherwise the engine cannot be
sciousness and lead to death. started due to the integrated safety
interlock.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ven- 왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
are entering the vehicle while driving, have For more information, see “Manual trans- to position 3 and hold until the engine
the cause determined and corrected imme- mission” (컄 page 154). starts (컄 page 33).
diately. If you must drive under these condi-
tions, drive only with at least one window For information on turning off the engine,
fully open. see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 56).
46

Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission* Starting Starting difficulties

왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set If the engine does not start as described,
to P. carry out the following steps:
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting
to position 3 and hold until the engine procedure (컄 page 46).
starts (컄 page 33). Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
i
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 363).
You can also use the “touch-start”
Gearshift pattern for automatic function. Turn the SmartKey in the If the engine does not start after several
transmission starter switch to position 3 and release starting attempts, there could be a mal-
P Park position with gear selector lever it again immediately. The engine then function in the engine electronics or in the
lock starts automatically. fuel supply system.
R Reverse gear 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
N Neutral 왘 Depress the brake pedal. Center.
D Drive position
The gear selector lever lock is released.
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission*” (컄 page 156). For information on turning off the engine,
see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 56).
47

Getting started
Driving
Parking brake 왘 Release parking brake by pulling on i

handle 1. You can open a locked door from the
The warning lamp ; (USA only) inside. Open door only when conditions
or 3 (Canada only) in the are safe to do so.
instrument cluster goes out. You can deactivate the automatic
locking using the control system
Driving (컄 page 145).
왘 Depress the brake pedal.
왘 Move gear selector lever to position D !
or R (manual transmission: first or Simultaneously depressing the
1 Release handle reverse gear). accelerator pedal and applying the
2 Parking brake brake reduces engine performance and
i causes premature brake and drivetrain
Warning! G Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Wait for the gear selection process to
wear.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the complete before setting the vehicle in !
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock motion.
If you hear a warning signal when driv-
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend- ing off, you have forgotten to release
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un- 왘 Release the brake pedal. the parking brake.
locked vehicle. Children could release the 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator.
parking brake, which could result in an acci-
Release the parking brake.
dent and/or serious injury. Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
matic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.
48

Getting started
Driving
After a cold start, the automatic transmis- ! Switching on headlamps

sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. Do not run cold engine at high engine
This allows the catalytic converter to reach speeds. Running a cold engine at high For more information on headlamps, see
its operating temperature earlier. engine speeds may shorten the service “Lighting” (컄 page 109).
life of the engine.
Low beam headlamps
Warning! G
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift Warning! G dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- Vehicles with automatic transmission:
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
vent this type of loss of control. ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
! erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
Vehicles with automatic transmission: could lose control of the vehicle and hit
Place the gear selector lever in someone or something. Only shift into gear
position R only when the vehicle is when the engine is idling normally and when
stopped in order to avoid damaging the your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Exterior lamp switch
transmission.
1 Off
For more information on driving, see “Driv- 2 Low beam headlamps on
ing instructions” (컄 page 265).
49

Getting started
Driving
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to 왘 Push combination switch in direction of 왘 Press combination switch in direction
position B. arrow 1. of arrow 1 or 2.
The low beam headlamp indicator The high beam headlamp indicator The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp B in the instrument cluster lamp A in the instrument cluster lamp L or K in the instrument
comes on (컄 page 24). comes on (컄 page 24). cluster flashes (컄 page 24).
The combination switch resets automati-
High beam Turn signals
cally after major steering wheel move-
The combination switch is located on the ments.
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
left of the steering column. i
To signal minor directional changes
such as changing lanes, press combi-
nation switch only to point of resis-
tance and release. The corresponding
turn signals will flash three times.
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
50

Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers Switching on windshield wipers !

왘 Turn the combination switch to the Vehicles with rain sensor*:
The combination switch is located on the Do not leave windshield wipers in
desired position depending on the
left of the steering column. intermittent setting when the vehicle is
intensity of the rain.
taken to an automatic car wash or
0 Windshield wipers off
during windshield cleaning. Wipers will
I Intermittent wiping operate in the presence of water
II Normal wiper speed sprayed on the windshield, and wipers
may be damaged as a result.
III Fast wiper speed
The switch should not be left in
i intermittent setting as the wipers will
Vehicles without rain sensor: wipe the windshield once every time
When the vehicle is standing still, the the engine is started. Dust that
Combination switch wiper speed returns to next lower accumulates on the windshield might
setting. scratch the glass and/or damage the
1 Single wipe
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
2 Switching on windshield wipers Vehicles with rain sensor*: dry windshield.
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). Intermittent wiping interval is
dependent on wetness of windshield.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by
the rain sensor.
51

Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping Wiping with windshield washer fluid !

왘 Set the wiper switch to position I. 왘 Push combination switch in direction of If anything blocks the windshield
arrow 1 past the resistance point. wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch
i them off immediately.
The windshield wipers operate with
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when 앫 For safety reasons, withdraw
washer fluid.
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front SmartKey from starter switch
door is opened. For information on filling up the washer
before attempting to remove any
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
blockage.
Single wipe and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 285). 앫 Remove blockage.
왘 Press combination switch briefly in
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on
direction of arrow 1.
again.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid. If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫 set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
앫 have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
52

Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving The coolant temperature is In case of accident

above 248°F (120°C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
cooling the engine.
앫 An ignition cable may be damaged. cumstances.
왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
앫 The engine electronics may not be op- 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
and turn off the engine. Allow engine ties.
erating properly.
and coolant to cool.
앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
왘 Check the coolant level and add
the catalytic converter and damaged it. termined:
coolant if necessary (컄 page 283).
왘 Give very little gas. 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as If no damage can be determined on the
soon as possible. 앫 major assemblies
앫 fuel system
앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
53

Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake

You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
the SmartKey is removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 1 Release handle
Warning! G 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 2 Parking brake
앫 Move the gear selector lever to 왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
With the engine not running, there is no
position P (manual transmission: first or
power assistance for the brake and steering reverse gear). When the engine is running, the
system. In this case, it is important to keep warning lamp ; (USA only)
앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of or 3 (Canada only) in the
effort is necessary to brake and steer the 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front instrument cluster will be illuminated.
vehicle. wheels towards the road curb.
앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
앫 Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle
when leaving.
54

Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps

왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- to M (컄 page 49).
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
For more information on headlamps, see
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend- dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
“Lighting” (컄 page 109).
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un- position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
locked vehicle. Children could release the cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
parking brake and/or move the gear selec- objects.
tor lever from position P, either of which Always set the parking brake in addition to
could result in an accident and/or serious shifting to position P (manual transmission:
injury. first or reverse gear).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
55

Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine 왘 Press the seat belt release button 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
(컄 page 44). button ‹ on the SmartKey
왘 Place the gear selector lever in (컄 page 32).
Allow the retractor to completely
position P (manual transmission: first
rewind the seat belt by guiding the All turn signal lamps flash three times.
or reverse gear).
latch plate. The locking knobs in the doors move
i down.
i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
With the SmartKey removed and the
tion to shifting to position P (manual
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
Warning! G
transmission: first or reverse gear).
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels switched off.
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
towards the road curb.
your vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch Warning! G unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey cle equipment may cause an accident
from the starter switch. To prevent possible personal injury, always
and/or serious personal injury.
The immobilizer is activated. keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
i cially careful when small children are For more information, see “Locking and
Vehicles with automatic transmission: around. unlocking” (컄 page 88).
The SmartKey can only be removed Before closing doors, make sure there is no
from the starter switch with the gear possibility of someone getting caught in a
selector lever in position P. door during closing.
56

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
57

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster (컄 page 24) comes on: after you start the engine. This shows that
of the vehicle. the restraint systems are operational.
앫 for about four seconds when you turn
The restraint systems are the SmartKey in the starter switch to A malfunction in the system has been
position 1. It then goes out briefly, detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Seat belts
comes on again and remains lit until
앫 fails to extinguish after approximately
앫 Emergency tensioning device you start the engine.
four seconds.
앫 Air bags 앫 for about four seconds when you start 앫 does not come on at all.
앫 Child seats the engine by turning the SmartKey.
앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Child seat recognition i or while driving.
앫 Lower anchors and tethers for children The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if For safety reasons, we strongly
(LATCH) the SmartKey in the starter switch is recommend that you visit an authorized
turned to position 2 and left there. The Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
As independent systems, their protective indicator lamp will go out when you
effects work in conjunction with each have the system checked.
start the engine.
other. For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 307).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 67).
58

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
comes on during driving or does not come air bags inflate, it is very important for the
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal properly seated position and to wear your
recommend that you visit an authorized impacts (front air bags), or side impacts seat belts.
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have (side impact air bags and head protection For maximum protection in the event of a
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may window curtain air bags). However, no sys- collision always be in normal seated position
not be activated when needed in an acci- tem available today can totally eliminate in- with your back against the backrest. Fasten
dent, which could result in serious or fatal juries and fatalities. your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and erly positioned on your body.
The activation of the air bags temporarily
unnecessarily which could also result in
releases a small amount of dust from the Since the air bag inflates with considerable
injury.
air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju- speed and force, a proper seating and hands
In addition, improper work on the SRS rious to your health, nor does it indicate a on steering wheel position will help to keep
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause you at a safe distance from the air bag.
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy- some temporary breathing difficulty for peo- Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. or too close to the air bag can be seriously
be performed by qualified technicians. Con- To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the injured by an air bag as it inflates with great
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you force in the blink of an eye:
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
position with your back against the seat
then get fresh air by opening a window or
backrest. 컄컄
door.
59

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as Failure to follow these instructions can
rearward, still permitting proper opera- possible rearward from the dashboard result in severe injuries to you or other
tion of vehicle controls. The distance when the seat is occupied. occupants.
from the center of the driver’s breast- 앫 Occupants, especially children, should
bone to the center of the air bag cover If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
never lean their heads in the area of the you make the buyer aware of this safety
on the steering wheel must be at least door where the side air bag inflates. This
ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should information. Be sure to give the buyer this
could result in serious injuries or death
be able to accomplish this by a combina- Operator's Manual.
should the air bag be triggered. Always
tion of adjustments to the seat and sit nearly upright, properly use the seat
steering wheel. If you have any prob- belts and appropriate size infant or child
lems, please see an authorized restraint system.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 Children 12 years old and under must
앫 Do not lean with your head or chest never ride in the front seat, except in a
close to the steering wheel or dash- Mercedes-Benz authorized
board. BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering which operates with the BabySmartTM
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
side the rim can increase the risk and vate the passenger front air bag when it
potential severity of hand/arm injury is properly installed. Otherwise they will
when driver front air bag inflates. be struck by the air bag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-
tal injury will result.
1
Automotive Corp.
60

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G To help avoid the possibility of injury, please

follow these guidelines:
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Accident research shows that the safest (1) Occupants, especially children, should Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
place for children in an automobile is in the never place their bodies or lean their (1-800-367-6372) for details.
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child heads in the area of the door where the
12 years old or under in the front passenger side air bag inflates. This could result in i
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to activate only
a BabySmartTM1 child restraint which will air bag be activated. in certain frontal impacts (front
turn off the passenger front air bag. (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use air bags) and in side impacts (side
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any the seat belts and use an appropriately impact and head protection window
side impact air bag. sized infant or child restraint system for curtain air bags) which exceed preset
It should be noted that with respect to both all children 12 years old or under. thresholds.
front and rear side impact air bags there is a (3) Always wear seat belts properly. Only during these types of impacts, if of
possibility for a side air bag related injury if sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
occupants, especially children, are not prop- If you believe that, even with the use of
ment tresholds, will they provide their
erly seated or restrained when next to a side these guidelines, it would be safer for your
supplemental protection.
air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a rear seat occupants to have both rear door
side impact in order to do its job. mounted side air bags deactivated, then The driver and passengers should
deactivation can be accomplished upon always wear their seat belts. Otherwise
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens your written request to do so at an autho- it is not possible for air bags to provide
Automotive Corp. rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional their supplemental protection.
cost.
61

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In cases of other frontal impacts, Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
앫 No modifications of any kind may be
angled impacts, roll-overs, other side emergency tensioning device and made to any components or wiring of
impacts, rear collisions, or other acci- air bag the SRS. This includes changing or re-
dents, the air bags will not be activat- moving any component or part of the
ed. The driver and passengers will then Warning! G SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
be protected by the fastened seat
belts. wheel hub, passenger front air bag
앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
cover, door trim panels, or door frame
We caution you not to rely on the highly stressed in an accident must be
trims, and installation of additional elec-
replaced and their anchoring points
presence of the air bags in order to trical/electronic equipment on or near
must also be checked. Only use belts in-
avoid wearing your seat belt. SRS components and wiring. Keep area
stalled or supplied by an authorized
between air bags and occupants free
Your vehicle was originally equipped Mercedes-Benz Center.
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
with air bags that are designed to acti- 앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning umbrellas, etc.).
vate in certain impacts exceeding a devices (ETDs) are designed to function
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
preset threshold to reduce the poten- on a one-time only basis. An air bag or
They could tear.
tial and severity of injury. It is important ETD that was activated must be
to your safety and that of your passen- replaced 앫 Do not make any modification that could
gers that you replace deployed air bags change the effectiveness of the belts.
and repair any malfunctioning air bags 앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
to make sure that the vehicle will con- may severely weaken them. In a crash
tinue to provide supplemental crash they may not be able to provide ade-
protection for occupants. quate protection.
62

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Driver and front passenger air bags are

앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers 앫 Given the considerable deployment
from the coat hooks or handles over the speed and the textile structure of the deployed:
door. These items may turn into projec- air bags, there is the possibility of abra- 앫 in the event of a frontal impact
tiles and cause head and other injuries sions or other injuries resulting from
when curtain air bag is deployed. air bag deployment. 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always When you sell your vehicle we strongly 앫 independently of the side impact
keep both feet on the floor in front of the urge you to give notice to the subsequent air bags
seat. owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
앫 Air bag system components will be hot alerting them to the applicable section in
which do not exceed the system’s
after an air bag has inflated. Do not the Operator’s Manual.
deployment thresholds. You will then be
touch.
protected by the fastened seat belts.
앫 In addition, improper repair work on the Front air bags
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS The passenger front air bag will only be
inoperative or causing unintended deployed if:
air bag deployment. Work on the SRS 앫 the front passenger seat is occupied
must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an autho- 앫 the 56 indicator lamp in the
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. center console is not lit (컄 page 70)
앫 For your protection and the protection 앫 the impact exceeds a preset
of others, when scrapping the air bag deployment treshold
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
1 Driver’s air bag
Center. 2 Passenger front air bag
63

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
! The side impact air bags and window The use of seat belts and infant and child
Do not place objects heavier than curtain air bags are deployed: restraint systems is required by law in all
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger 50 states, the District of Columbia, the
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
seat. This could cause the front or side U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset
impact air bag on the front passenger Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
deployment threshold
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds occupants should have their seat belts
the system's deployment threshold. 앫 independently of the front air bags fastened whenever the vehicle is in
The front passenger side impact air bag motion.
Side impact air bags, window curtain will only deploy if the system senses that For more information on seat belts, see
air bags the front passenger seat is occupied. “Fastening the seat belt” (컄 page 43).
The window curtain air bags 1 fill up the The side impact air bags and window
area between the A and C pillars (see curtain air bags are not deployed in
i
arrows). impacts which do not exceed the system’s For information on infants and children
deployment threshold. traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and
Seat belts children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 67).
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
before the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates and a warning
1 Window curtain air bag chime sounds for approximately six
2 Side impact air bags seconds when the engine is started.
64

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
off. Always make sure your passengers are backrest in an excessively reclined position stressed in an accident must be replaced
properly restrained, even those sitting in the as this can be dangerous. You could slide and their anchoring points must also be
rear and pregnant women. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide checked.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Only use seat belts which have been
sition your seat belt greatly increases your domen or neck. That could cause serious or approved by Mercedes-Benz.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the Do not make any modifications to the seat
accident. You and your passengers should belts. This can lead to unintended activation
always wear seat belts. wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body. or to failure.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
can be considerably more severe without severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Warning! G not be able to provide adequate protection.
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be Have all work carried out only by qualified
Never let more people ride in the vehicle technicians. Contact an authorized
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Be sure Mercedes-Benz Center.
or killed.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
death is lessened if you are properly wearing use a seat belt for more than one person at
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as a time.
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
65

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
der. In a crash, your body would move belt around a person and another per-
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
too far forward. That would increase the son or other objects.
앫 Seat belts can only work when used chance of head and neck injuries. The 앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
properly. Never wear seat belts in any belt would also apply too much force to crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
other way than as described in this sec- the ribs or abdomen, which could se- of the belt to manage impact forces. The
tion, as that could result in serious inju- verely injure internal organs such as twisted belt against your body could
ries in case of an accident. your liver or spleen. cause injuries.
앫 Each occupant should wear their seat 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable 앫 Pregnant women should also use a
belt at all times, because seat belts help objects in or on your clothing, such as lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
reduce the likelihood of and potential eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these should be positioned as low as possible
severity of injuries in accidents, includ- might cause injuries. on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible sure on the abdomen.
system includes SRS (driver air bag, on your hips and not across the abdo-
passenger front air bag, side impact 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
men. If the belt is positioned across your panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
air bags, head protection window cur- abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
tain air bags for side windows), ETD keep both feet on the floor in front of the
in a crash. seat.
(seat belt emergency tensioning device),
and front seat knee bolsters. The sys-
tem is designed to enhance the protec-
tion offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front
air bags and ETD) and side (side impact,
window curtain air bags and ETD) im-
pacts which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.
66

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning Children in the vehicle
seat belt force limiter devices remove slack from the belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more If an infant or child is traveling with you in
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
snugly against the body. Belt force limiters the vehicle:
seats are equipped with emergency
reduce the force exerted by the seat belts 앫 Secure the child using an infant or child
tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
on occupants during a crash. restraint appropriate to the age and
The ETD is designed to activate in the
size of the child.
following cases:
Warning! G 앫 Make sure that the infant or child is
앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts
properly secured by a belt at all times
exceeding a preset severity level. An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that while the vehicle is in motion.
앫 if the restraint systems are operational was activated must be replaced.
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
and functioning correctly. When scrapping the emergency tensioning
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
See 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 58). device, our safety instructions must be
straint system can be obtained from any
followed. These are available at your
i Mercedes-Benz Center.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ETDs for the front seats will only
Infant and child restraint systems
activate if the respective front seat belt
! Only use a BabySmartTM1 compatible child
is fastened (latch plate properly
inserted into buckle). Do not place objects heavier than restraint for the front passenger seat in
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger this vehicle.
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will seat. This could cause the front or side
activate with or without the respective impact air bag on the front passenger
seat belt fastened. side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system's deployment threshold.
1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
67

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
We recommend all infants and children be i !

properly restrained at all times while the For information on child seats with The use of infant or child restraints is
vehicle is in motion. anchor fittings for tether anchorages, required by law in all 50 states, the
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver‘s see “Installation of infant and child re- District of Columbia, the U.S. territo-
seat belt have special seat belt retractors straint systems” (컄 page 72). ries and all Canadian provinces.
for secure fastening of child restraints. For information on child seat anchors - Infants and small children should be
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re- LATCH-type (컄 page 73). seated in an appropriate infant or child
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull restraint system properly secured by a
the shoulder belt out completely and let it lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
retract. During the seat belt retraction, a Warning! G child restraint lower anchorage system
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
that the special seat belt retractor is acti- Never release the seat belt buckle while the Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down vehicle is in motion, since the special seat and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
on child restraint to take up any slack. belt retractor will be deactivated. Standards 213 and 210.2.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.
68

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
A statement by the child restraint man-

ufacturer of compliance with this stan- Warning! G Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
dard can be found on the instruction During an accident, they could be crushed
Children 12 years old and under must never
label on the restraint and in the between the occupant and seat belt.
ride in the front seat, except in a
instruction manual provided with the
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1 A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
restraint.
compatible child seat, which operates with significantly increased if the child restraints
When using any infant or child restraint the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve- are not properly secured in the vehicle and
system, be sure to carefully read and hicle to deactivate the passenger front the child is not properly secured in the child
follow all manufacturer’s instructions air bag when it is properly installed. Other- restraint.
for installation and use. wise they will be struck by the air bag when Children too big for child restraint systems
Please read and observe warning labels it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious must ride in back seats using regular seat
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or fatal injury will result. belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
or child restraints. According to accident statistics, children and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
are safer when properly restrained in the seat may be necessary to achieve proper
rear seating positions than in the front seat- belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
ing positions. Infants and small children they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
must ride in back seats and be seated in an belt fits properly without a booster.
appropriate infant or child restraint system, When the child restraint is not in use,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in from becoming a projectile in the event of
accordance with the child seat manufactur- an accident. 컄컄
er’s instructions.
1
Automotive Corp.
69

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Special BabySmartTM compatible child Self-test BabySmartTM without special

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
seats, designed for use with the child seat installed
hicle; even if the children are secured in a
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil- After turning the SmartKey in the starter
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
dren in a child restraint system may use ve- switch to position 1 or 2,
required for use with the BabySmartTM
hicle equipment and may cause an accident the 56 indicator lamp comes on
air bag deactivation system. With the
and/or serious personal injury. for approximately six seconds and then
special child seat properly installed, the
goes out.
passenger front air bag will not deploy.
BabySmartTM1 air bag deactivation If the 56 indicator lamp should not
system The 56 indicator lamp will be
come on or is continuously lit, the system
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
The 56 indicator lamp is located on is not functioning. You must see an
removed or in starter switch position 0.
the center console. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
i seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
The system does not deactivate the
side impact air bag and the emergency For more information, see “Practical hints”
tensioning device. (컄 page 308).
1 Front passenger front air bag off

indicator lamp
Automotive Corp.
70

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

The BabySmartTM1 air bag deactivation sys- When using a BabySmartTM compatible Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat child seat on the front passenger seat, the phones and like electronic devices on the
designed to operate with it. It will not work passenger front air bag will not deploy only front passenger seat. Signals from such
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM if the 56 indicator lamp (컄 page 70) devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
compatible. remains illuminated. system. Such signal interference may cause
Never place anything between seat cushion Please be sure to check the 56 indicator lamp (컄 page 70)
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the 56 indicator lamp every time not to come on during self-test or be contin-
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys- you use the special system child seat. uously lit, indicating that the system is not
tem. The bottom of the child seat must Should the 56 indicator lamp go out functioning.
make full contact with the passenger seat while the restraint is installed, please check
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat installation. If the 56 indicator lamp
could cause injuries to the child in case of an remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM
accident, instead of protecting the child. restraint to transport children on the front
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for passenger seat until the system has been
installation of special child seats. repaired.
1
Automotive Corp.
71

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint

systems Warning! G
This vehicle is equipped with tether Always lock backrest in its upright position
anchorages for a top tether strap at each when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
of the rear seating positions. sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage

ring 3. 2 Hook
왘 Guide tether strap between head 3 Anchorage ring
restraint and top of seat back. 왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
Head restraint must be installed (if of the tether strap, to anchorage
removable) and positioned such that ring 3.
1 Cover of top anchorage ring the top tether strap can pass freely Once the top tether anchorage hook is
왘 Make sure the rear backrest is locked between the head restraint and top of attached, the child restraint itself can be
in its upright position (컄 page 239). seat back. secured. Tighten the top tether strap
Make sure the tether strap is not according to the child restraint
twisted. manufacturer's instructions
72

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i The foldable LATCH-type anchors are i

For safety, make sure the hook has located between the seat cushion and the If a child seat is not installed, the
attached to the ring beyond the safety backrest. LATCH-type anchors can be folded
catch, as illustrated. back between the seat cushion and the
backrest (컄 page 74).
왘 Reinstall cover 1 after removing the
tether strap. i
The child seat must be firmly attached
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type in the right and left side anchors 1.
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH- With a child seat installed in the left
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) rear seat, the seat belt for the center
type anchors (at each of the outer rear seat occupied by a passenger must op-
seats) for the installation of a LATCH-type 1 Anchors erate freely. Guide seat belt between
child seat with the matching mounting 2 Button its seat cushion mount and backrest
fittings. mount along outside of right side child
왘 Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold
forward until they audibly lock in place. seat anchor.
왘 Install child seat according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.
73

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
To fold anchors back

왘 Press down button 2 on each anchor
Warning! G The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 1.
and return anchor 1 to its catch. Children too big for child restraint systems An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
must ride in back seats using regular seat loose during an accident which could result
i
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest in serious injury or death to your child.
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or
be used and can be installed using the
seat may be necessary to achieve proper child seat anchors 1 must be replaced.
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
seat according to the manufacturer’s Do not leave children unattended in the
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
instructions. vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
belt fits properly without a booster.
child restraint system.
Before installing the child seat, make sure
anchors 1 are folded out and locked in
place.
Install child seat according to manufactur-
er’s instructions.
74

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation Activating override switch

왘 Slide override switch 3 to the right.
Warning! G
You can block the rear door window
operation (for instance when you have The rear door windows can no longer Activate the override switch when children
children riding in the rear passenger be operated using the respective are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
compartment). switch located in the rear doors. The children may otherwise injure them-
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
The override switch is located on the door i dow opening.
control panel of the driver’s door.
Operation of the rear door windows When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
with the switches located on the door SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
control panel of the driver’s door is still the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
possible. ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
Deactivating override switch equipment can cause an accident and/or
왘 Slide override switch 3 to the left. serious personal injury.
The rear door windows can be operated

again using the respective switch For more information, see “Power win-
located in the rear doors . dows” (컄 page 223).
1 Enable
2 Disable
3 Override switch
75

Safety and Security
Panic alarm*
An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i

lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only:
21/2 minutes. 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
This device complies with Part 15 of
one second.
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Deactivating
(1) This device may not cause harmful
왘 Press button 1 again. interference, and
or (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
왘 Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button
device could void the user’s authority
i to operate the equipment.
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 1.
76

Safety and Security
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) accidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
Traction System) 앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
The ABS, BAS, ESP, and 4MATIC (if so effectiveness.
i equipped) cannot reduce this risk.
In winter operation, the maximum
Always adjust your driving style to the The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
effectiveness of the ABS, ESP, and
prevailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
4MATIC (if so equipped) is only
not lock during braking. This allows you to
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires),
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
or snow chains as required.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
77

Safety and Security
Braking Emergency brake maneuver BAS

At the instant one of the wheels is about to 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal.
emergency situations. If you apply the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
the regulating mode.
Warning! G provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the tially reducing the braking distance. Apply
brake pedal while experiencing the The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of continuous full braking pressure until the
pulsation. physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can emergency braking situation is over. The
it increase braking or steering efficiency ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
yields the advantages provided by the ABS, When you release the brake pedal, the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
namely braking power and ability to steer brakes function again as normal. The BAS
forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
the vehicle. is then deactivated.
including those resulting from excessive
The pulsating brake pedal can be an speed in turns, following another vehicle too
indication of hazardous road conditions closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten- Warning! G
and functions as a reminder to take extra tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
care while driving. dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- tem is still functioning normally, but without
less or dangerous manner which could jeop- the additional brake boost available that
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of BAS would normally provide in an emergen-
others. cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 302) and (컄 page 310).
78

Safety and Security
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run- Never switch off the ESP when you see the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning and monitors the vehicle's traction ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
it increase braking efficiency beyond that (force of adhesive friction between the speedometer. In this case, proceed as
afforded by the condition of the vehicle tires and the road surface) and handling. follows:
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ- as possible.
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
and by limiting the engine output, the ESP tor.
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
especially useful while driving off and on the prevailing road conditions.
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also Failure to observe these guidelines could
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
stabilizes the vehicle during braking cause the vehicle to skid.
ous manner which could jeopardize the
maneuvers.
user’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
The ESP warning lamp v in the from excessive speed.
For more information, see “Practical hints” speedometer flashes when the ESP is
(컄 page 311). engaged.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
79

Safety and Security
! Switching off the ESP

Warning! G Vehicles without 4MATIC:
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
Because of the ESP’s automatic Warning! G
operation, the engine must be shut off
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
or 1) when normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
앫 the parking brake is being tested on stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns or
a brake test dynamometer system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
dard driving maneuvers.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the
capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must front axle raised
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
ous manner which could jeopardize the Active braking action through the ESP the ESP in driving situations where it would
user’s safety or the safety of others. may otherwise seriously damage the be advantageous to have the drive wheels
brake system. spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
For information on vehicles with grip such as:
i
4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic 앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in
The ESP will only function properly if
traction system (4MATIC) with the deep snow in conjunction with snow
you use wheels of the recommended
ESP” (컄 page 82). chains
tire size (컄 page 380).
앫 in sand or gravel
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 306) and (컄 page 312). !
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
80

Safety and Security
When you switch off the ESP The switch is located on the center
앫 the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle
console. Warning! G
앫 the engine output is not limited, which When the ESP warning lamp v is
allows the drive wheels to spin and illuminated continuously, the ESP is
thus cut into surfaces for better grip switched off.
앫 the traction control will still brake a Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
spinning wheel ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
앫 the ESP continues to operate when you
are braking
!
i Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
1 ESP switch (off/on)
When the ESP is switched off and one extended period with the ESP switched
or more drive wheels are spinning, the 왘 Press switch 1. off. This may cause serious damage to
ESP warning lamp v in the speed- The ESP warning lamp v in the the drivetrain which is not covered by
ometer flashes. However, the ESP will speedometer comes on. the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
then not stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP is deactivated.
Switching on the ESP
왘 Press switch 1 again.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP switched on.
81

Safety and Security
Four wheel electronic traction system ! !

(4MATIC) with the ESP Do not tow with one axle raised. Because of the ESP’s automatic
Otherwise the transfer case can be operation, the engine must be shut off
Models with all-wheel-drive only. (SmartKey in starter switch position 0
damaged, which is not covered by the
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. or 1) when the parking brake is being
use available traction, e.g. during winter tested on a brake test dynamometer
operation in mountains under snowy Active braking action through ESP may
conditions, by applying power to all four !
otherwise seriously damage the front
wheels. Performance testing must only be con-
or rear axle brake system.
ducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
Operational tests with the engine
Warning! G Otherwise the transfer case can be
running can only be conducted on a
damaged, which is not covered by the
two-axle dynamometer.
If you see the ESP warning lamp v flash- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ing in the speedometer, proceed as follows:
i
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible At highly demanding operating condi-
tions, the electronic traction system
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
may temporarily switch off to prevent
tor
overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to The message unavailable
the prevailing road conditions See Operator’s Manual will then
Failure to observe these guidelines could appear in the multifunction display
cause the vehicle to skid. while the ESP warning lamp v is
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting flashing. The ESP is still functioning
from excessive speed. normally.
82

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system* i
The alarm will stay on, even if the
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
activating element (a door, for
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
example) is immediately closed.
someone opens
Activating
앫 a door i
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
앫 the trunk lid If the alarm stays on for more than
switch.
앫 the hood 30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Deactivating The alarm system will also be triggered Tele Aid system* (컄 page 248) provid-
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). when ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to
앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle and properly activated, and that neces-
i (컄 page 85) sary cellular service and GPS coverage
Starting the engine will also deactivate are available.
the immobilizer. 앫 opening the vehicle with the
mechanical key
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
83

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system i Disarming the alarm system

The indicator lamp is in the switch for the If the turn signal lamps do not flash 왘 Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
tow-away alarm* in the center console. three times, one of the following
The turn signal lamps flash once to
elements may not be properly closed:
indicate that the alarm system is
앫 a door deactivated.
앫 the trunk lid
i
앫 the hood The alarm system will rearm automati-
Close the respective element and lock cally after approximately 40 seconds if
the vehicle again. no door or the trunk lid was opened.
Canceling the alarm

1 Indicator lamp To cancel the alarm:
왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey. 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is or
activated. Indicator lamp 1 begins to 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
flash after approximately 30 seconds switch.
after arming the alarm system.
84

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm* Arming tow-away alarm The switch is located on the center
console.
왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when The tow-away alarm is automatically
someone attempts to raise the vehicle. armed after about 30 seconds.
i i
The tow-away protection alarm is When you unlock your vehicle, the
triggered, for example, if the vehicle is tow-away protection disarms
lifted on one side. automatically. The tow-away alarm
remains disarmed until you lock the
If the alarm stays on for more than
vehicle again.
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the 1 Tow-away alarm off switch
Tele Aid system* (컄 page 248) provid- Disarming tow-away alarm 2 Indicator lamp
ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, 왘 Switch off ignition.
and properly activated, and that neces- switch off the tow-away alarm feature
sary cellular service and GPS coverage before towing the vehicle, or when parking i
are available. on a surface subject to movement, such as You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
a ferry or auto train. while the ignition is switched on. 컄컄
85

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
컄컄왘 Press switch 1.

Indicator lamp 2 in switch comes on
briefly.
왘 Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed
until you lock your vehicle again.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
or
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
86

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission*
Good visibility
Climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
87

Controls in detail
In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and
find detailed information on how to oper- unlocking, see “Getting started”
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- (컄 page 32) and (컄 page 54).
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section SmartKey
will be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are giv- The locking tabs for the mechanical key
en at the beginning of each segment. portion of the two SmartKeys are a SmartKey with remote control
different color to help distinguish each 1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey unit. 2 Š Opening button for the trunk lid
The SmartKey provides an extended oper- 3 Mechanical key locking tab
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is 4 Œ Unlock button
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when 5 Battery check lamp
you are in close proximity to it. 6 Â Panic button* (컄 page 76).
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: i

앫 the doors Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
앫 the trunk anti-theft alarm system* have
앫 the fuel filler flap SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 6.
88

Controls in detail
Factory setting Global locking

Warning! G 왘 Press button ‹.
Global unlocking
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the All turn signal lamps flash three times.
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock 왘 Press button Œ.
The locking knobs in the doors move
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend- All turn signal lamps flash once. The down. The anti-theft alarm system* is
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocking knobs in the doors move up. activated.
locked vehicle. It is possible for children to The anti-theft alarm system* is
open a locked door from the inside, which switched off. Selective setting
could result in an accident and/or serious
The vehicle will lock again automatically If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
injury.
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm to reprogram the SmartKey so that
system* within approximately 40 seconds pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
! of unlocking if: door and the fuel filler flap.
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid 앫 neither door nor trunk is opened 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of simultaneously for about five seconds
electromagnetic radiation. 앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
starter switch
twice. 컄컄
i 앫 the central locking switch is not
You can also open and close the power activated
windows (컄 page 225) and power
tilt/sliding sunroof* (컄 page 229) from
outside using the SmartKey.
89

Controls in detail
컄컄 The SmartKey will then function as Global locking !

follows:
왘 Press button ‹. If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then either
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler All turn signal lamps flash three times.
the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
flap The locking knobs in the doors move
charged, the SmartKey is malfunction-
down. The anti-theft alarm system* is
왘 Press button Œ once. ing or the vehicle battery is drained.
activated.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The 앫 Check the batteries in the
locking knob in the driver's door moves Restoring to factory setting SmartKey (컄 page 91) and replace
up. The anti-theft alarm system* is them if necessary (컄 page 343).
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
switched off. simultaneously for about six seconds 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock
until battery check lamp 5 flashes the driver’s door (컄 page 337) and
Global unlocking twice. the trunk lid (컄 page 338).
왘 Press button Œ twice. 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the
All turn signal lamps flash once. The driver’s door (컄 page 338).
locking knobs in the doors move up. 앫 Have the vehicle battery and the
The anti-theft alarm system* is battery connections checked
switched off. (컄 page 360).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
90

Controls in detail
Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the trunk lid Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. You can unlock and open the trunk If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
separately. you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 5 comes on
briefly to indicate that the SmartKey A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
batteries are in order. (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i 왘 Press button Š until trunk lid 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
unlocks and begins to open. mechanical key immediately to your
If battery check lamp 5 does not
car insurance company.
come on briefly during check, then the !
SmartKey batteries are discharged. 왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock
The trunk lid swings open upwards
replaced.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 343). automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
You can obtain the required batteries
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
ment.
Center.
i
If the batteries are checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
91

Controls in detail
Opening the doors from the inside Rear doors Opening the trunk
왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the
You can open a locked door from the
respective rear door to unlock door. Opening the trunk from the outside
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so. 왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
respective rear door to open door. (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
i The handle is located above the rear

license plate recess.
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system*.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
1 Locking knob
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
2 Inside door handle
SmartKey.
Front doors 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
1 Handle
switch.
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the
respective front door to open door.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
92

Controls in detail
The vehicle must be unlocked. Opening the trunk from the inside 왘 Press remote trunk lid switch 1 until
the trunk begins to open.
왘 Pull on handle 1. You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary. The indicator lamp in the switch
The trunk lid unlocks and begins to
remains lit as long as the trunk is open.
open. A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. !
!
The remote trunk lid switch is located on The trunk lid swings open upwards
the driver’s door. automatically. Always make sure there
automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance. is sufficient overhead clearance.
The trunk can also be opened using

The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid
emergency release” (컄 page 95).
emergency release” (컄 page 95).
1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator

lamp
93

Controls in detail
Closing the trunk

To prevent possible personal injury, always Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk other dangers such as visibility blockage,
opening when closing the trunk. Be espe- exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
cially careful when small children are interior.
around.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it Do not place the SmartKey in the open
with you and lock your vehicle. Do not leave trunk. You may lock yourself out.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
1 Handle
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
왘 Lower trunk lid using handle 1. vised use of vehicle equipment may cause i
an accident and/or serious personal injury. If the vehicle was previously centrally
왘 Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
on it.
cally after closing it. The turn signals
will flash three times to confirm lock-
ing.
94

Controls in detail
Trunk lid emergency release Illumination of the emergency release i

button: If the vehicle has previously been
The emergency release button is located
앫 The button will flash for 30 minutes locked from the outside with the
on the inside of the trunk lid.
after opening the trunk. SmartKey, opening the trunk from the
inside using the emergency release
앫 The button will flash for 60 minutes
button will trigger the anti-theft alarm
after closing the trunk.
system*.
i To cancel the alarm, do one of the
The emergency release button unlocks following:
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
standing still or in motion.
SmartKey.
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
i switch.
1 Emergency release button The emergency release button does
왘 Briefly press emergency release not open the trunk lid if the vehicle
button 1. battery is discharged or disconnected.
The trunk lid unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
!
automatically.
95

Controls in detail
Automatic central locking i Locking and unlocking from the inside

The doors unlock automatically after an
The doors and the trunk automatically lock You can lock or unlock the doors and the
accident if the force of the impact
when the ignition is switched on and the trunk from inside using the central locking
exceeds a preset threshold.
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. To prevent the vehicle door locks from example, if you want to lock the vehicle
locking, deactivate the automatic before starting to drive.
You can open a locked door from the
central locking when the vehicle
inside. Open door only when conditions You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap
are safe to do so. 앫 is pushed or towed with the central locking or unlocking
앫 is on a test stand switch.
You can deactivate the automatic locking Warning! G

mode using the control system, see “Set-
ting automatic locking” (컄 page 145). When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
96

Controls in detail
The switches are located in the center i Locking

console. You can open a locked door from the 왘 Press central locking switch 1.
inside. Open door only when conditions
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
are safe to do so.
locks.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not Unlocking
unlock using the central unlocking
왘 Press central unlocking switch 2.
switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch 1
앫 while in the selective remote con-
1 Central locking switch
trol mode, only the door opened
2 Central unlocking switch
from the inside is unlocked.
앫 while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is
unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside.
97

Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see When exiting the vehicle, with the
“Adjusting” (컄 page 35). Warning! G easy-entry/exit feature activated and
depending on your selection, the steering
Easy-entry/exit feature* You must make sure no one can become wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s
trapped or injured by the moving steering seat moves a few inches to the rear when
This feature allows for easier entry into and wheel and driver’s seat when the you:
exit from the vehicle. easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
The easy-entry/exit feature can be To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, switch,
activated or deactivated in the do one of the following:
or
Convenience submenu of the control 앫 Press seat adjustment switch*
system (컄 page 146). (컄 page 30). 앫 open the driver’s door with the
앫 Move steering column stalk* SmartKey in starter switch position 0
(컄 page 40). or 1.
앫 Press memory position switch* i
(컄 page 107).
If the current position for the steering
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- wheel is in the uppermost tilt position,
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the steering wheel will no longer be
Children could open the driver’s door and able to move upward when the
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
98

Controls in detail
Seats
If the current seat position falls into a i Removing and installing front seat
factory-set position range and the For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will head restraints
system recognizes the current seat not return to its last set position with
position to be rearward enough for For information on head restraint
the easy-entry/exit feature activated if
easy entry and exit, the driver’s seat adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 35).
the system recognizes the last set posi-
will not move to the rear when the tion as an extreme forward position. i
easy-entry/exit feature is activated. Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
or move to a factory-set maximum
When entering the vehicle, with the that it is as close to the head as
forward position. To again fully return
easy-entry/exit feature activated, the possible.
the driver’s seat to your last set posi-
steering wheel or, depending on your tion or to memory position, adjust the
selection, the steering wheel and driver’s seat to the desired position or press
seat will return to their last set position or and hold the respective memory
Warning! G
a factory-set maximum forward position position switch* (컄 page 107). For your protection, drive only with properly
when you:
앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on
앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
switch with the driver’s door closed. tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation. 컄컄
99

Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄 Front seat head restraints, manual seat Front seat head restraints, power seat*
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
i
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier
removal and installation of the head
restraints. 1 Release button 1 Head restraint switch
Removing front seat head restraints
왘 Pull head restraint to its highest Removing front seat head restraints
position. 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
왘 Push release button 1 and pull out head restraint is fully extended.
head restraint.
왘 Pull out head restraint.
Installing front seat head restraints
왘 Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘 Push release button 1 and adjust
head restraint to desired position.
100

Controls in detail
Seats
Installing front seat head restraints Head restraint height (rear outer seats) i
왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold for Adjust the head restraint in such a way
about five seconds. that it is as close to the head as
possible.
왘 Push head restraint down until it
engages.
왘 Adjust head restraint to desired Warning! G
position (컄 page 38).
For your protection, drive only with properly
Rear seat head restraints positioned head restraints.
1 Release button
Warning! G Raising: head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
왘 Manually adjust the height of the head tial for injury to the head and neck in the
For safety reasons, always drive with the
restraint by pulling it upward. event of an accident or similar situation.
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
head restraints. Head restraints are
Keep the area around head restraints clear push release button 1 and pull the
intended to help reduce injuries during an
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the head restraint out.
accident.
folding operation of the head restraints. Lowering:
왘 To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
101

Controls in detail
Seats
Folding head restraints back with Folding head restraints back with Placing head restraints upright
release button switch in the center console (rear outer
seats)
The rear seat head restraints can be folded
backward for increased visibility.
왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it

locks into position.
1 Switch for rear seat head restraints
1 Release button 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 46). Warning! G
왘 Push release button 1. 왘 Press switch 1.
Make sure the head restraints engage when
The head restraint will fold backward. The rear seat head restraints will fold placing them upright. Otherwise their
backward. protective function cannot be assured.
i
You can also fold the rear outer seat
head restraints back using the switch
in the center console (컄 page 102).
102

Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraint tilt (rear outer seats)

Two different head restraint angle
Warning! G
positions are available: For your protection, drive only with properly
왘 Press the release button (컄 page 102) positioned head restraints.
and tilt the head restraint to the Adjust head restraint so that the center of
desired position. the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
Removing and installing rear seat head tial for injury to the head and neck in the
restraints (rear outer seats) event of an accident or similar situation.
1 Release button
i Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Adjust the head restraint in such a way head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Removing rear seat head restraints
that it is as close to the head as ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent. 왘 Fold back head restraint (컄 page 102).
possible.
Do not interchange head restraints from 왘 Pull head restraint to its highest
i front and rear seat. position.
The rear center seat head restraint 왘 Push release button 1 and pull out
cannot be removed. head restraint.
Installing rear seat head restraints

왘 Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘 Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
103

Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour seats* 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).
This multicontour seat has a movable seat Seat cushion depth

cushion and inflatable air cushions built
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
into the backrest to provide additional
length of your upper leg using
lumbar and side support.
switch 1.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be Backrest contour
continuously varied with switches on the
왘 Adjust the contour of the backrest to
side of the seat after switching on ignition.
1 Seat cushion depth the desired position using switches 2
2 Backrest bottom and 3.
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest side bolster adjustment Backrest side bolsters
왘 Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
104

Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating* The red indicator lamps 2 in the switch Switching on seat heating
show the heating level selected.
왘 Press switch 1 twice.
The switches for the front seats are
located in the center console. Level Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
3 Three indicator lamps on. switch come on.
After approximately five minutes, 왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
seat heating is automatically desired seat heating level is reached.
switched to level 2.
Switching off seat heating
2 Two indicator lamps on.
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
After approximately ten minutes,
indicator lamps 2 go out.
seat heating is automatically
switched to level 1. i
1 One indicator lamp on. If one or all of the indicator lamps 2
1 Seat heating switch
After approximately 20 minutes, on the seat heating switch are flashing,
2 Indicator lamps
seat heating is automatically there is insufficient voltage due to too
switched off. many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heating switches off auto-
off No indicator lamp on.
matically.
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as
sufficient voltage is available.
105

Controls in detail
Memory function*
! You can store up to three different settings The following settings are not
Prior to operating the vehicle, the for each SmartKey. key-dependent. They are stored when
driver should check and adjust the seat using the buttons on the front passenger
The following settings are stored when
height, seat position fore and aft, and door:
using the buttons on the driver’s door:
seat backrest angle if necessary, to 앫 Front passenger seat, backrest and
앫 Driver’s seat, backrest and head
ensure adequate control, reach and head restraint position
restraint position
comfort. The head restraint should also
be adjusted for proper height. See also 앫 Steering wheel position
the section on air bags (컄 page 59) for Warning! G
앫 Exterior rear view mirror positions
proper seat positioning.
These key-dependent memory settings Do not activate the memory function while
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to can be deactivated if desired. For informa- driving. Activating the memory function
ensure adequate control, reach, operation on key-dependent memory settings, while driving could cause the driver to lose
tion and comfort. Both the interior and see “Setting key-dependency” control of the vehicle.
exterior rear view mirrors should be (컄 page 147).
adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
106

Controls in detail
Memory function*
The memory button and memory position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
switch are located on the door.
왘 Adjust the seat, steering wheel and !
exterior rear view mirrors to the
Do not operate the power seats using
desired position (컄 page 35).
the memory button if the seat backrest
왘 Turn memory position switch 2 to the is in an excessively reclined position.
selected memory position. Doing so could cause damage to front
왘 Press memory button 1. or rear seats.
왘 Release memory button 1 and press 왘 Turn memory position switch 2 to the
memory position switch 2 within selected memory position.
three seconds.
1 Memory button 왘 Press and hold memory position
All settings are stored to the selected switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel
2 Memory position switch
position. and exterior rear view mirrors have
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). completely moved to the stored
or positions.
왘 Open the respective door. i
Releasing the memory position switch
stops movement to the stored
positions immediately.
107

Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing exterior rear view mirror 왘 Press button 3.

parking position
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
For easier parking, you can adjust the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
that you can see the right rear wheel as with button 2 so that you see the rear
soon as you engage reverse gear R. wheel and the road curb.
For information on activating the parking 왘 Press memory button 1.
position feature, see “Activating exterior 왘 Within three seconds, press bottom of
rear view mirror parking position*” adjustment button 2.
(컄 page 170). 1 Memory button
2 Adjustment button The parking position is stored if the
i 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror does not move.
You can store a parking position for the mirror button
passenger-side exterior rear view i
왘 Stop the vehicle.
mirror for each SmartKey. If the mirror does move, repeat the
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). above steps. After the setting is stored,
you can move the mirror again.
108

Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch M Off
headlamps and use the turn signals, see Daytime running lamp mode
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 49) The exterior lamp switch is located on the (컄 page 111)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 50). dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
U Automatic headlamp mode
i Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 111)
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
the country where the vehicle is regis- license plate lamps, side marker
tered, you must have the headlamps lamps, instrument panel lamps)
modified for symmetrical low beams. B Low beam headlamps (or high
Relevant information can be obtained beam headlamps when the
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz combination switch is pushed
Center. forward) and parking lamps
Exterior lamp switch
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
109

Controls in detail
Lighting
i
With the SmartKey removed from the
Warning! G The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
starter switch and the driver’s door the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
open, a warning sounds if the parking times.
lamps or low beam headlamps are 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
switched on. edly when the system senses bright
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
ambient light, for example light from
The message Switch off lights. oncoming traffic. position U.
appears in the multifunction display 앫 the headlamps will not be automatically With the SmartKey in starter switch
switched on under foggy conditions. position 1, only the parking lamps will
Manual headlamp mode To minimize risk to you and to others, switch on and off automatically.
The low beam headlamps and the parking activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp When the engine is running, the low
lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic beam headlamps, the tail and parking
exterior lamp switch. and/or ambient lighting conditions require lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
you to do so. side marker lamps will switch on and
Automatic headlamp mode In low ambient lighting conditions, only off automatically.
The following lamps switch on and off switch from position U to B with the
automatically depending on the brightness vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
of the ambient light: to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
앫 Low beam headlamps
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
앫 Tail and parking lamps accident.
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
110

Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode Canada only: USA only:

왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is manda- By default, the daytime running lamp mode
position M or U. tory and therefore in a constant mode. is deactivated. Activate the daytime
running lamp mode using the control
When the engine is running, the low beam Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
headlamps are switched on. When the engine is running, and you shift
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 142).
In low ambient light conditions, the from a driving position to position N or P,
following lamps will switch on additionally: the low beam headlamps will switch off When the engine is running, and you turn
with a three-minute delay. the exterior lamp switch to position C
앫 Tail and parking lamps or B, the manual headlamp mode has
When the engine is running, and you
앫 License plate lamps priority over the daytime running lamp
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to mode.
앫 Side marker lamps position C, the parking lamps
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
For nighttime driving you should turn the switch on additionally.
on (컄 page 109).
exterior lamp switch to position B to 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
permit activation of the high beam head- position B, the manual headlamp
lamps. mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps
activated and the exterior lamp switch switch on (컄 page 109).
in position M, the high beam head-
lamps cannot be switched on.
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.
111

Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security i Front fog lamps

illumination Fog lamps will operate with the parking 왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps
The locator lighting and the night security lamps and/or the low beam headlamps (컄 page 109).
illumination are described in the “Control on. Fog lamps should only be used in
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
system” section, see “Setting locator light- conjunction with low beam headlamps.
stop.
ing” (컄 page 143) and “Setting night secu- Consult your State or Province Motor
rity illumination” (컄 page 143). Vehicle Regulations regarding permis- The front fog lamps switch on.
sible lamp operation. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
Fog lamps exterior lamp switch comes on
i (컄 page 109).
Warning! G Fog lamps cannot be switched on with 왘 Push down the exterior lamp switch.
the exterior lamp switch in
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, position U. For switching on the fog The front fog lamps switch off.
only switch from position U to B with lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching position B first. exterior lamp switch goes out.
from U to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
112

Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Combination switch High beam
왘 Switch on the front fog lamps 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
The combination switch is located on the
(컄 page 112). position B or U (컄 page 109).
left of the steering column.
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to 왘 Push the combination switch in
second stop. direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
The rear fog lamp switches on. high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp A in the instrument cluster
exterior lamp switch comes on
comes on (컄 page 24).
(컄 page 109).
왘 Pull the combination switch in direction
왘 Push down the exterior lamp switch to
of arrow 2 to its original position to
first stop.
switch off the high beam.
The rear fog lamp switches off.
Combination switch The high beam headlamp indicator
The yellow indicator lamp † in the 1 High beam lamp A in the instrument cluster
exterior lamp switch goes out. 2 High beam flasher goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
High beam flasher
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
113

Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘 Press hazard warning flasher 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
The hazard warning flasher can be
switch 1. again.
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter All turn signals are flashing. i
switch.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
The hazard warning flasher switches on activated automatically, press hazard
With the hazard warning flasher
automatically when an air bag deploys. warning flasher switch 1 once to
activated and the combination switch
The hazard warning flasher switch is set for either left or right turn, only the switch it off.
located on the upper part of the center respective turn signals will operate
console. when the ignition is switched on.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
114

Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting Activating automatic control Deactivating automatic control

왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center 왘 Press the = symbol on rocker
The controls are located in the overhead
position. switch 3.
control panel.
Interior lamps are switched on in The interior lighting remains switched
darkness, even when you: off, even when you:
앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 unlock the vehicle
앫 open a door 앫 open a door
앫 remove the SmartKey from the 앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch starter switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a
preset time, see “Setting interior lighting Manual control
delayed shut-off” (컄 page 145).
1 Rear interior lights Switching all front interior lights on and
2 Right front reading lamp i off
3 Rocker switch for automatic control If the door remains open, the interior 왘 Press the W symbol on rocker
system lamps switch off automatically after switch 3.
4 Left front reading lamp approximately five minutes, when the
The front interior lights come on.
SmartKey is removed or in starter
switch position 0. 왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center
position to activate the automatic
An interior lamp switched on manually
control.
does not go out automatically.
115

Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching rear interior lights on and off Door entry lamps Trunk lamp
왘 Press button V.
The appropriate door entry lamp switches The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid
The lights in the rear passenger on if a door is opened in darkness and if is opened.
compartment come on. the interior lighting is switched to auto-
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
왘 Press button V again. matic function.
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
The lights in the rear passenger The entry lamp switches off automatically off automatically after approximately ten
compartment go out. when the door is closed. minutes.
i
Switching right front reading lamp on
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
and off
switch to position 0 and switch off the
왘 Press right button X. exterior headlamps, the door entry
The right reading lamp comes on. lamps will remain lit for approximately
five minutes.
왘 Press right button X again.
The right reading lamp goes out.
Switching left front reading lamp on and

off
왘 Press left button X.
The left reading lamp comes on.
왘 Press left button X again.
The left reading lamp goes out.
116

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination To brighten illumination
cluster, see “At a glance” (컄 page 24).
왘 Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
Use reset button 1 to adjust the
illumination brightness for the instrument The instrument cluster illumination will
cluster. brighten.
i To dim illumination
The instrument cluster illumination is
왘 Turn reset button 1 counterclock-
dimmed or brightened automatically to
wise.
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
also be adjusted automatically when
1 Reset button you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
The instrument cluster is activated when lamps.
you
앫 open a door
앫 switch on ignition
앫 press reset button 1
앫 switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the control system (컄 page 135).
117

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge During severe operating conditions, e.g.

Warning! G stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tempera-
The coolant temperature gauge is on the ture may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
left side in the instrument cluster 앫 Driving when your engine is badly
overheated can cause some fluids which The engine should not be operated with
(컄 page 24).
may have leaked into the engine the coolant temperature above 248°F
compartment to catch fire. You could be (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
seriously burned. gine damage which is not covered by the
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
118

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Trip odometer Tachometer Outside temperature indicator
왘 Make sure you are viewing the trip The red marking on the tachometer
odometer and main odometer in the (컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine Warning! G
multifunction display (컄 page 121). speed.
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è ! signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
Avoid driving at excessive engine is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
wheel until the trip odometer appears
speeds, as it may result in serious Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
(컄 page 122).
engine damage that is not covered by ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
instrument cluster (컄 page 117) until
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
the trip odometer is reset. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
119

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
The outside temperature is indicated in the The temperature sensor is located in the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
multifunction display (컄 page 121). For front bumper area. Due to its location, the ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
information on how to select the unit of the sensor can be affected by road or engine garage), you will notice a delay before the
indicated temperature, i.e. degrees heat during idling or slow driving. This lower temperature is displayed.
Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), means that the accuracy of the displayed
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
see “Selecting temperature display mode” temperature can only be verified by com-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
(컄 page 135). parison to a thermometer placed next to
perature indications caused by heat
the sensor, not by comparison to external
radiated from the engine during idling or
displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
slow driving.
120

Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
앫 call up information about your vehicle focus when driving.
앫 change vehicle settings For your safety and the safety of others,
For example, you can use the control selecting features through the multifunction
system to find out when your vehicle is steering wheel should only be done by the
next due for service, to set the language driver when traffic and road conditions
for messages in the instrument cluster permit it to be done safely.
display, and much more. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
i covering a distance of 44 feet 3 Current program mode
The displays for the audio systems (approximately 14 m) every second. 4 Current gear selector lever
(radio, CD player) will appear in English,
position/gear range
regardless of the language selected.
The control system relays information to 5 Digital clock
the multifunction display. 6 Status indicator (outside tempera-
ture/digital speedometer)
121

Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
function steering wheel will alter what is
The displays in the multifunction display Operating the control system shown in the multifunction display.
and the settings in the control system are 2 Selecting the submenu or setting
The information available in the multifunc-
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- the volume:
tion display is arranged in menus, each
tion steering wheel. Press button
containing a number of functions or sub-
æ up/to increase menus.
ç down/to decrease The individual functions are then found
3 Telephone*: within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
Press button erations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
s to take a call
tion or to customize the settings for your
t to end a call vehicle.
4 Menu systems:
Press button i
C 230 Kompressor Sport, and
è for next menu C 320 Sport:
ÿ for previous menu Steering wheel in these vehicles will
5 Moving within a menu: vary from steering wheel shown.
Press button However, multifunction steering wheel
symbols and feature description apply
j for next display to Sport models as well.
k for previous display
122

Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions The number of menus available in the sys-
functions within each menu, as being you will find a number of submenus for tem depends on which optional equipment
arranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For is installed in your vehicle.
instructions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ The menus are described on the following
“Submenus in the Settings menu”
repeatedly, you will pass through each pages.
(컄 page 133).
menu one after the other.
앫 If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
123

Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
124

Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7

Standard display AUDIO NAV* Vehicle status Settings Trip computer Telephone*
message memory
(컄 page 126) (컄 page 127) (컄 page 130) (컄 page 130) (컄 page 132) (컄 page 148) (컄 page 150)
Digital speedometer Select radio Activate route Call up vehicle mal- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone
or outside tempera- station guidance function, warning settings statistics after book
ture and system status start
messages stored in
Commands/submenus
memory
Call up maintenance Select satellite Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for
service display radio station* ter submenu statistics since name in
(USA only) the last reset phone book
Check engine oil Operate the Time/Date Call up range
level CD player* submenu
Lighting
submenu
Vehicle
submenu
Convenience
submenu
125

Controls in detail
Control system
i Standard display menu If you see another display, press

The headings used in the menus table button è or ÿ repeatedly until the
In the standard display, the main odometer standard display appears.
are designed to facilitate navigation
and the trip odometer are shown in the
within the system and are not neces- You can select the functions in the
multifunction display.
sarily identical to those shown in the standard display menu with button k
control system displays. or j.
The first function displayed in each The following functions are available:
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in. Function Page
Display digital speedometer or 127
outside temperature
Calling up maintenance service 292
display
Checking engine oil level 280
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
126

Controls in detail
Control system
Display digital speedometer or outside i AUDIO menu

temperature You can have the outside temperature
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly displayed instead of the digital
the audio equipment which you currently
until the digital speedometer appears speedometer. You can select the
have turned on.
in the multifunction display. setting in the submenu Instr.Cl. via
the function Status line display If no audio equipment is currently turned
The current vehicle speed is shown in
(컄 page 136). on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the
the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function Page
Select radio station 128
Select satellite radio station* 128
(USA only)
Operate the CD player* 129
1 Digital speedometer
127

Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Select satellite radio station*
until the desired station is found. (USA only)
왘 Turn on the radio (컄 page 186).
Vehicles with COMAND*: i The satellite radio is treated as a radio
Refer to separate operating application.
You can only store new stations using
instructions.
the corresponding feature on the radio 왘 Select satellite radio with the
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly (컄 page 194). corresponding soft key (SAT) in the
until the currently tuned station radio menu.
Vehicles with COMAND*:
appears in the multifunction display.
Refer to separate operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
1 SAT mode and preset number

1 Waveband setting 2 Channel name or number
2 Station frequency
128

Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Operate the CD player*

until the desired channel is found.
왘 Turn on the radio and select the
i CD player (컄 page 201).
Feature description is based on
preliminary information available at
instructions.
time of printing.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
For more information on satellite radio
until the settings for the CD currently
operation, see “Introduction to satellite
being played appear in the
radio* (USA only)” (컄 page 196).
multifunction display. 1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
Vehicles with COMAND*: 2 Current track
instructions. 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.
129

Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu Vehicle status message memory menu

Warning! G
The NAV menu contains the functions Use the vehicle status message memory
needed to operate your navigation system. menu to scan malfunction and warning Malfunction and warning messages are only
messages that may be stored in the indicated for certain systems and are inten-
system. Such messages appear in the mul- tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
until the message NAV appears in the
tifunction display and are based on condi- and warning messages are simply a remind-
tions or system status the vehicle’s system er with respect to the operation of certain
앫 If the navigation system is switched off, has recorded. systems and do not replace the owner’s
the message NAV OFF appears in the and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
multifunction display. the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
앫 If the navigation system is on, different required maintenance and safety checks
messages, depending on the current performed on the vehicle and by bringing
state of the navigation system, appear the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
in the multifunction display. Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 309).
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the multifunction
display.
130

Controls in detail
Control system
No vehicle status messages 왘 Press button k or j. i

If no conditions are recorded in memory, The stored messages will now be The vehicle status message memory
the message in the multifunction display displayed in the order in which they will be cleared when you turn the
is: No message have occured. For malfunction and SmartKey in the starter switch to
warning messages, see “Vehicle status position 1 or 2. You will then only see
Vehicle status messages have been messages in the multifunction display” high-priority messages in the multi-
recorded (컄 page 309). function display (컄 page 309).
If conditions have occured causing status Should the vehicle’s system record any
messages to be recorded, the number of conditions while driving, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction messages will reappear in the multifunc-
display: tion display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
1 Number of messages
131

Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu Resetting all settings i

You can reset all the functions of all The settings you have changed will not
In the Settings menu there are two
submenus to the factory settings. be reset unless you confirm the action
functions:
by pressing the reset button a second
왘 Press the reset button in the
앫 The function Reset to factory time. After approximately five seconds,
instrument cluster (컄 page 117) for
settings, with which you can reset all the Settings menu reappears in the
approximately three seconds.
the settings to the original factory multifunction display.
settings. The request to press the reset button
For safety reasons, the following
once more to confirm appears in the
앫 A collection of submenus with which functions are not reset while driving:
you can make individual settings for
앫 the Hdlamp mode function in the
your vehicle.
Lighting submenu
앫 the Key dependency function in the
until the Settings menu appears in the
Convenience submenu
왘 Press the reset button once more.

The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
132

Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Resetting the functions of a submenu
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
왘 Press button k or j. For each submenu you can reset all the
with button æ.
functions to the factory settings.
The collection of the submenus
Move within the submenus with
appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Move to a function in the submenu.
button k or j to the individual
functions. 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 117) in
the instrument cluster for approxi-
The settings themselves are made with mately three seconds.
button æ or ç.
The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
왘 Press the reset button once more.
All functions of the submenu will reset
왘 Press button ç. to factory settings.
The selection marker moves to the next i

submenu. The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
the Settings menu reappears in the
133

Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can Detailed instructions on making individual
be changed within the various menus. settings can be found on the following
pages.
Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience

Selecting temperature Time synchronization with head Setting daytime running Setting automatic Activating
display mode unit* lamp mode (USA only) locking easy-entry/exit feature
Selecting speedometer Setting the time (hours) Setting locator lighting Setting key-dependency
display mode
Selecting language Setting the time (minutes) Setting night security Setting parking position
illumination for exterior rear view
mirror
Selecting display (speed Selecting time display mode Setting interior lighting
display or outside delayed shut-off
temperature) for status
indicator
Selecting automatic time
change (Daylight Saving Time
(DST) summer/Standard time
winter)
Setting the date (month)
Setting the date (day)
Setting the date (year)
134

Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the Instr.Cl. submenu via the 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
Settings menu. Use the Instr.Cl. button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl.
submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu. submenu.
display settings.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
The following functions are available: until the message Temperature until the message Disp.Unit
indicator appears in the multifunction Speed/odo appears in the multifunction
Function Page
display. display.
Selecting temperature display 135
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
mode
setting. setting.
Selecting speedometer display 135
mode
Selecting language 136
Selecting display (speed display 136
or outside temperature) for
status indicator
왘 Press button æ or ç to set tem- 왘 Press button æ or ç to set

perature unit to °C (degrees Celsius) speedometer unit to km or Miles.
or °F (degrees Fahrenheit).
135

Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language 왘 Press button æ or ç to select The selection marker is on the current
the language to be used for the setting.
왘 Move the selection marker with
multifunction display messages.
button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl.
submenu. Available languages:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 German
until the message Language appears in 앫 English
the multifunction display.
앫 French
The selection marker is on the current
setting. 앫 Italian
앫 Spanish
왘 Press button æ or ç to select
Selecting display (digital speedometer
the desired setting.
or outside temperature) for status
indicator The selected display is then shown
continuously in the lower display.
button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. The other display now appears in the
submenu. menu of the standard display:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 Digital speedometer
until the message Status line or
display appears in the multifunction
display. 앫 Outside temperature
136

Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu Time synchronization with head unit* Setting the time (hours)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function can only be seen on vehicles This function can only be seen with audio
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date with COMAND* and navigation module*. system.
submenu to change the instrument cluster
display settings. i
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
The following functions are available: submenu.
For information on setting the time,
Function Page 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly refer to the separate COMAND
until the message Time synchro. operating instructions.
Time synchronization with 137
w/Head Unit appears in the multifunc-
head unit*
tion display. 왘 Move the selection marker with
Setting the time (hours) 137 button æ or ç to the Time/Date
Setting the time (minutes) 138 setting. submenu.
Selecting time display mode 139 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Selecting automatic time change 139 until the message Time Hours appears
(Daylight Saving Time (DST) in the multifunction display. 컄컄
summer/Standard time winter)
Setting the date (month) 139
Setting the date (day) 140
Setting the date (year) 141
왘 Press button æ or ç to select

the desired setting.
137

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 The selection marker is on the hour Setting the time (minutes) The selection marker is on the minute
setting. setting.
This function can only be seen with audio
system.
i
For information on setting the time,
refer to the separate COMAND
operating instructions.

왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
submenu.
hour. minutes.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press the reset button in the instru- 왘 Press the reset button in the instru-
until the message Time Minutes
ment cluster (컄 page 117) to confirm. ment cluster (컄 page 117) to confirm.
The hour is set and stored. The minutes are set and stored.
138

Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting time display mode Selecting automatic time change 왘 Press button æ or ç to select if
(Daylight Saving Time (DST) the changeover between summer and
summer/Standard time winter) winter time should be automatic or
manual.
submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Setting the date (month)
submenu.
until the message Clock display
appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
system.
The selection marker is on the current until the message Change-over
Summer / Winter time appears in the i
setting.
The selection marker is on the current For information on setting the date,
setting. refer to the separate COMAND

submenu.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set until the message Date Set MM appears
in the multifunction display. 컄컄
the 12h or 24h time display mode.
139

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 The selection marker is on the month Setting the date (day) The selection marker is on the day
setting. setting.
system.
i
For information on setting the date,
refer to the separate COMAND

왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
submenu.
month. day.
until the message Date Set day
140

Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (year) The selection marker is on the year Lighting submenu
setting.
This function can only be seen with audio Access the Lighting submenu via the
system. Settings menu. Use the Lighting
submenu to change the lamp and lighting
i settings on your vehicle.
The following functions are available:
For information on setting the date,
refer to the separate COMAND Function Page
operating instructions. Setting daytime running lamp 142
mode (USA only)
button æ or ç to the Time/Date Setting locator lighting 143
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the Setting night security 143
submenu.
year. illumination
until the message Date Set YY appears Setting interior lighting delayed 145
in the multifunction display. shut-off
141

Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode The selection marker is on the current In low ambient light conditions the
(USA only) setting. following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫 Parking lamps
i
This function is not available in 앫 Tail lamps
countries where the daytime running 앫 License plate lamps
lamp mode is mandatory and therefore
in a constant mode. 앫 Side marker lamps
For more information on the daytime
왘 Move the selection marker with running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
button æ or ç to the Lighting (컄 page 109).
submenu.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select i
manual operation (Manual) or daytime For safety reasons, resetting the
until the message Hdlamp mode appears
running lamp mode (Constant) Lighting submenu to factory settings
in the multifunction display.
activated. (컄 page 133) while driving will not
deactivate the daytime running lamp
With daytime running lamp mode activated
mode.
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, the low beam The following message appears in the
headlamps are switched on when the multifunction display:
engine is running. Lighting - Cannot be completely
reset to factory sets. while
driving.
142

Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Setting night security illumination
until the message Surround lighting (Headlamps delayed shut-off)
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in Use this function to set whether and how
position U, the following lamps will The selection marker is on the current long you would like the exterior lamps to
switch on when the vehicle is unlocked setting. illuminate during darkness after exiting the
with the SmartKey during darkness: vehicle and all doors closed.
앫 Parking lamps With the delayed shut-off feature activated
앫 Tail lamps and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
앫 License plate lamps off, the following lamps will switch on after
앫 Side marker lamps you have removed the SmartKey from the
starter switch:
앫 Front fog lamps
앫 Parking lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. 앫 Tail lamps
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
If you do not open a door after unlocking 앫 License plate lamps
the locator lighting function On.
with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off 앫 Side marker lamps
automatically after approximately
position U when exiting the vehicle 앫 Front fog lamps
40 seconds.
(컄 page 109).
왘 Move the selection marker with If you do not open a door after removing
The locator lighting feature is the SmartKey from the starter switch, the
button æ or ç to the Lighting
activated. lamps will switch off automatically after
submenu.
approximately 60 seconds.
143

Controls in detail
Control system
i 왘 Press button æ or ç to select You can temporarily deactivate the

You can reactivate this function within the desired lamp-on period. delayed shut-off feature:
ten minutes by opening a door. You can select: 왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
앫 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature
왘 Move the selection marker with position 0.
is deactivated.
button æ or ç to the Lighting 왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back to
submenu. 앫 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec.
or 60 sec., select the desired position 0.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly lamp-on period. The delayed shut-off feature is
until the message Hdlamp delay off deactivated. It will reactivate as soon
appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
as you reinsert the SmartKey in the
position U before turning off the
The selection marker is on the current starter switch.
engine (컄 page 109).
setting.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is activated.
144

Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off 왘 Press button æ or ç to select Setting automatic locking
the desired lamp-on period.
Use this function to set whether and how Use this function to activate or deactivate
long you would like the interior lighting to You can select: the automatic central locking. With the
remain lit during darkness after you have automatic central locking system
앫 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature
removed the SmartKey from the starter activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
is deactivated.
switch. vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
앫 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec. (15 km/h).
왘 Move the selection marker with or 20 sec., the interior lighting de-
button æ or ç to the Lighting layed shut-off feature is activated 왘 Move the selection marker with
submenu. with the desired lamp-on period. button æ or ç to the Vehicle
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly submenu.
until the message Int. light delay Vehicle submenu 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
off appears in the multifunction until the message Automatic door lk.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
display. appears in the multifunction display. 컄컄
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
The selection marker is on the current to make general vehicle settings.
setting.
The following function is available:
Function Page
Setting automatic locking 145
145

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 The selection marker is on the current Convenience submenu Activating easy-entry/exit feature*
setting.
Access the Convenience submenu via the Use this function to activate and
Settings menu. Use the Convenience deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
submenu to change the settings for a (컄 page 98).
number of convenience features.
The following functions are available: Warning! G
Function Page You must make sure no one can become
Activating 146 trapped or injured by the moving steering
easy-entry/exit feature* wheel and driver’s seat when the
Setting key-dependency 147 easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch Setting parking position* for 148 To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
the automatic central locking On or Off. exterior rear view mirror do one of the following:
앫 Press seat adjustment switch*
(컄 page 30).
앫 Move steering column stalk*
(컄 page 40).
앫 Press memory position switch*
(컄 page 107).
146

Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button æ or ç to change Setting key-dependency

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
the easy-entry/exit setting.
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Use this function to set whether the
Children could open the driver’s door and The following settings are available for memory settings for the seats, the steering
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit the easy-entry/exit feature: wheel and the mirrors should be stored
feature, which could result in an accident separately for each SmartKey
Off The easy-entry/exit
and/or serious personal injury. (컄 page 106).
feature is
deactivated 왘 Move the selection marker with
왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the
button æ or ç to the Steer. Column Only the steering
Convenience submenu.
Convenience submenu. column is moved
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly St.col.+seat Both the steering
until the message Key dependency
until the message Easy-entry feature column and the seat
appears in the multifunction display. are moved
The selection marker is on the current setting.
setting.
컄컄
147

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄왘 Press button æ or ç to set 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Trip computer menu
key-dependency On or Off. until the message Mirror set.
parking aid appears in the Use the trip computer menu to call up
Setting parking position* for exterior multifunction display. statistical data on your vehicle.
rear view mirror The following information is available:
Use the Mirror set. parking aid function setting.
Function Page
to select whether the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror should be turned Fuel consumption statistics after 149
downward during parking maneuvers when start
reverse gear R is engaged. For additional Fuel consumption statistics 149
information, see “Activating exterior rear since last reset
view mirror parking position*”
Calling up range 150
(컄 page 170).
(distance to empty)
button æ or ç to the
Convenience submenu.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
function On or Off.
148

Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics after start i Fuel consumption since last reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly All statistics stored since the last 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the Trip engine start will be reset approximately until the first function of the Trip
computer menu appears in the four hours after the SmartKey in the computer menu appears in the
multifunction display. starter switch is turned to position 0 or multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message After start appears Resetting will not occur if you turn the until the message After reset appears
in the multifunction display. SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 in the multifunction display.
within this time period.
1 Distance driven since start 1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since start 2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since start 3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
149

Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics Calling up range (distance to empty) TEL menu*
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the Trip until the first function of the Trip
computer menu appears in the computer menu appears in the
Warning! G
multifunction display. multifunction display.
A driver’s attention to the road must always
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly be his/her primary focus when driving. For
until the reading that you want to reset until the message Distance appears in your safety and the safety of others, we
appears in the multifunction display. the multifunction display. recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the The calculated range based on the
telephone call. If you choose to use the
instrument cluster (컄 page 117) until current fuel tank level appears in the
telephone while driving, please use the
the value is reset to 0. multifunction display.
hands-free device and only use the
telephone when weather, road and traffic
conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
150

Controls in detail
Control system
앫 If the telephone is off, the message Answering a call

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
PHONE OFF appears in the multifunction
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- When your telephone is ready to receive
display.
out being connected to an external antenna) calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
from inside the vehicle while the engine is 앫 If the telephone is on: the multifunction display you will then see
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- the message:
The telephone will then search for a
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
network. During this time the multi-
possibly resulting in an accident and
function display is empty.
personal injury.
As soon as the telephone has found a
You can use the functions in the TEL menu network, the message READY appears in
to operate your telephone, provided it is the multifunction display.
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘 Switch on the telephone and
COMAND*.
왘 Press button s.
왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
You have answered the call. The
steering wheel repeatedly until the
duration of the call appears in the
message TEL appears in the
Which messages will appear in the
This standby message indicates that your
multifunction display depends on whether
telephone is ready for use and you can
your telephone is switched on or off:
operate it using the control system.
151

Controls in detail
Control system
Ending a call 왘 Press button j or k. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the desired name appears in the
왘 Press button t. The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
You have ended the call. The standby
This may take up to 30 seconds. The The stored names are displayed in
message appears in the multifunction
message Please wait appears in the ascending or descending alphabetical
display.
multifunction display. order.
Dialing a number from the phone book When the message Please wait
If your telephone is ready to receive calls, disappears, the phone book has been
you may select and dial a number from the loaded.
phone book at any time.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message TEL appears in the
1 Name from the phone book
152

Controls in detail
Control system
i Redialing
If you press and hold button j The control system stores the most
or k for longer than one second, recently dialed phone numbers. This
the system scrolls rapidly through the eliminates the need to search through your
list of names until you release the entire phone book.
button again.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
Cancel the quick search mode by until the message TEL appears in the
pressing button t. multifunction display.
왘 Press button s.
왘 Press button s. 앫 If no connection is made, the
control system stores the dialed The first number in the redial memory
The system dials the selected phone appears in the multifunction display.
number. number in the redial memory.
앫 If the connection is successful, the until the desired name appears in the
name of the party you called and multifunction display.
the duration of the call will appear
in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
153

Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Manual transmission is standard

equipment on select models and not Warning! G Warning! G
available on all models.
For vehicles equipped with a manual trans- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
For information on driving with a manual mission, getting out of your vehicle with the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
transmission, see “Manual transmission” gearshift lever not engaged in first or with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
(컄 page 46). reverse gear and parking brake engaged is children unattended in the vehicle, or with
dangerous. access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged could move the gearshift lever, which could
first or reverse gear alone may not prevent result in an accident and/or serious injury.
your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting
people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
Warning! G
engaging first or reverse gear (컄 page 54).
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels in order to obtain braking action. This could
towards the road curb. result in drive wheel slip and reduced
Do not park this vehicle in areas where vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
combustible materials such as grass, hay or prevent this type of loss of control.
leaves can come into contact with the hot
154

Controls in detail
Manual transmission
! Shifting into reverse

When you are shifting into the 5th
or 6th gear, make sure that you press !
the gearshift lever to the right. Other- Only shift into reverse gear R when the
wise, you could accidentally shift into vehicle is stationary, as the transmis-
the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the sion could otherwise be damaged.
transmission.
Downshifting gears leading to 왘 Stop the vehicle completely.
overrevving the engine can result in 왘 Fully depress clutch pedal.
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission engine damage that is not covered by
왘 Move the gearshift lever to neutral
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
position (no gear selected).
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill
왘 Move the gearshift lever to the left until
by using the clutch pedal. The clutch
may be damaged which is not covered you feel a certain resistance.
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited 왘 Push the gearshift lever past this
Warranty. resistance.
Do not exceed the engine speed limits. 왘 Then move the gearshift lever forward
Refer to tachometer (컄 page 119) for into position R.
engine speeds.
155

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission is standard i The automatic transmission selects indi-

equipment on select models and available During the brief warm-up, transmission vidual gears automatically, depending on:
as optional equipment on select other upshifting is delayed. This allows the 앫 the gear selector lever
models. catalytic converter to heat up more position D (컄 page 160) with
For more information on driving with an quickly to operating temperature. gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 159)
automatic transmission see “Automatic
앫 the selected program mode:
transmission*” (컄 page 47).
(C/S) (컄 page 162)
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving or
style by continually adjusting the shift (M/C/S) (C 55 AMG only)
points up or down. These shift point adjust- (컄 page 165)
ments are performed based on current
앫 the position of the accelerator
operating and driving conditions.
(컄 page 163)
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by 앫 the vehicle speed
adjusting its gear shift program. Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
156

Controls in detail
An additional indication of the current gear

selector lever position can be found on the Warning! G
cover of the shifting-gate.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
The indicators come on when you activate lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
opening a door) and go out after approxi- firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
mately 15 minutes. accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
1 Current gear range/gear selector lever when the engine is idling normally and when
position your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
2 Current program mode
The current gear range/gear selector lever When the gear selector lever is in
position and program mode (C/S) position D, you can influence transmission
or (M/C/S) appear in the multifunction shifting by:
display. 앫 limiting the gear range
앫 changing gears manually
157

Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit

To avoid overrevving the engine when 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission you
the gear selector lever is moved to in the D+ direction until D reappears in
can change the gears manually when the
the D- direction, the transmission will the multifunction display.
gear selector lever is in position D.
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
the left in the D- direction.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current the right in the D+ direction. in the D- direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select
transmission (컄 page 159). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal
by the shift program. This action simul- acceleration and deceleration. This will
taneously extends the gear range of the involve shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G transmission.

result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
158

Controls in detail
Gear ranges Effect Effect

With the gear selector lever in position D, é The transmission shifts through ç The transmission shifts through
you can limit the transmission’s gear range fourth gear only. second gear only.
by pressing the gear selector lever to the è The transmission shifts through Allows the use of engine’s
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit third gear only. braking power when driving:
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
With this selection you can use 앫 on steep downgrades
right (D+).
the braking effect of the engine.
앫 in mountainous regions
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 157). If you 앫 under extreme operating
press on the accelerator when the engine conditions
has reached its rpm limit, the transmission æ The transmission operates in
will upshift beyond any gear range limit first gear only.
selected.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
159

Controls in detail
Gear selector lever position Effect Effect

The SmartKey can only be ë Neutral
Effect removed from the starter switch
No power is transmitted from the
ì Park position with the gear selector lever in
engine to the drive axle. When
position P. With the SmartKey
Gear selector lever position the brakes are released, the
removed, the gear selector lever
when the vehicle is parked. Place vehicle can be moved freely
is locked in position P.
gear selector lever in position P (pushed or towed).
only when vehicle is stopped. If the vehicle’s electrical system To avoid damage to the trans-
The park position is not intended is malfunctioning, the gear mission, never engage N while
to serve as a brake when the selector lever could remain driving.
vehicle is parked. Rather, the locked in position P
driver should always set the (컄 page 340). If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
parking brake in addition to í Reverse gear Move gear selector lever to N
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle. Place gear selector lever in only if the vehicle is in danger of
position R only when vehicle is skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
stopped. ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
160

Controls in detail
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any Warning! G Warning! G
other reason with gear selector lever
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
in N can result in transmission damage
selector lever not fully engaged in position P SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
that is not covered by the
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
intended to or capable of preventing your children unattended in the vehicle, or with
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
or objects. could move the gear selector lever from
Always set the parking brake in addition to position P, which could result in an accident
shifting to position P (컄 page 54). and/or serious personal injury.
When parked on an incline, turn the front

wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
161

Controls in detail
Automatic shift program ! 왘 Press program mode selector

Never change the program mode when switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
The program mode selector switch is the gear selector lever is out of the desired program mode appears in
located on the lower part of the center position P. This could result in a the multifunction display (컄 page 157).
console. change of driving characteristics for Select C for comfort driving:
which you may not be prepared.
앫 The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
i gentler starts. This does not apply if
The last selected program full throttle is applied or gear
mode (C or S) is switched on when the range 1 is selected.
engine is restarted in the automatic
앫 Traction and driving stability are
program mode.
improved on icy roads.
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when
1 Program mode selector switch you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
C Comfort For comfort driving wheels are less likely to spin.
S Sport For standard driving
162

Controls in detail
Driving tips Stopping Maneuvering

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas,
Accelerator position e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
Your driving style influences the 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake.
transmission’s shifting behavior: releasing the brakes.
When you stop longer with the engine
Less throttle Earlier upshifting 왘 Accelerate gently.
idling or on an uphill gradient:
More throttle Later upshifting 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Kickdown Working on the vehicle
왘 Set the parking brake.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration. Warning! G
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
When working on the vehicle, set the
resistance.
parking brake and move gear selector lever
The transmission shifts into a lower to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
gear. roll away.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
163

Controls in detail
Steering wheel gearshift control The steering wheel gearshift buttons are i
(Speedshift) (C 55 AMG only) located to the left and right of the steering You cannot shift with the steering
wheel. wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
You can change the gears manually on the
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
steering wheel or by using the gear
selector lever (컄 page 158). The manual program mode M will not
be stored. When the engine is turned
! off with the manual program mode M
Allow engine to warm up under low selected, the transmission will go to
load use. Do not place full load on the the automatic program mode (C or S)
engine until the operating temperature when the engine is restarted.
has been reached. The last selected program
Shift into reverse gear R only when the mode (C or S) is switched on when the
vehicle is stopped. 1 Left button: downshift engine is restarted in the automatic
2 Right button: upshift program mode.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
164

Controls in detail
Downshifting Upshifting Manual shift program (C 55 AMG only)

왘 Press button 2 on the right side of the
In the manual program mode M you can
Warning! G steering wheel.
change the gears manually on the steering
The transmission shifts to the next wheel (컄 page 164) or by using the gear
higher gear. selector lever (컄 page 158).
result in drive wheel slip and reduced The gear range is extended when you are !
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not not driving in the manual program mode M
Allow engine to warm up under low
prevent this type of loss of control. (컄 page 159).
load use. Do not place full load on the
When driving in the manual program engine until the operating temperature
왘 Press button 1 on the left side of the mode M (컄 page 165), the transmission has been reached.
steering wheel. will shift from the current gear to the next
Shift into reverse gear R only when the
higher gear (컄 page 167).
The transmission shifts to the next vehicle is stopped.
lower gear.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
The gear range is limited when you are not extended period when driving off on
driving in the manual program mode M slippery road surfaces. This may cause
(컄 page 159). serious damage to the drivetrain which
When driving in the manual program is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
mode M (컄 page 165), the transmission Limited Warranty.
will shift from the current gear to the next
lower gear (컄 page 166).
165

Controls in detail
The program mode selector switch is Activating manual shift program Downshifting
located on the lower part of the center
왘 Press program mode selector
console.
switch 1 repeatedly until the M for the Warning! G
manual program mode M appears in
the multifunction display. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
prevent this type of loss of control.
is not limited.
You can change the gears manually when
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
the left in the D- direction
can upshift or downshift through the gears
(컄 page 158).
1 Program mode selector switch in succession.
or
M Manual For manual gear shifting The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (M/C/S) is 왘 Press button 1 on the left side of the
C Comfort For comfort driving
indicated in the multifunction display steering wheel (컄 page 164).
S Sport For standard driving (컄 page 157). The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
i
When you brake or stop, the transmis-
sion shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
166

Controls in detail
Upshifting Kickdown Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode)
! Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.
In the manual program mode M, the If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission will not upshift, even if transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
Deactivating manual shift program
the engine has reached its overrevving mission is most likely operating in limp
range. Shift up to the next gear before 왘 Press the program mode selector home (emergency operation) mode. In this
the engine has reached its overrevving switch (컄 page 166) repeatedly mode only second gear and reverse gear
range. Make absolutely certain that the until C or S appears in the multifunction can be activated.
engine speed does not reach the red display.
왘 Stop the vehicle.
marking on the tachometer or
(컄 page 24). Otherwise the engine 왘 Move gear selector lever to P.
could be damaged which is not covered 왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Turn off the engine.
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The transmission will go to the
Warranty 왘 Wait at least ten seconds before
automatic program mode (C or S).
restarting.
The manual program mode M is not
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to 왘 Restart the engine.
stored.
the right in the D+ direction 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D
(컄 page 158). i (for second gear) or R.
or The last selected program 왘 Have the transmission checked at an
mode (C or S) is switched on when the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
왘 Press button 2 on the right side of the
engine is restarted in the automatic soon as possible.
steering wheel (컄 page 164).
program mode.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
167

Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers, 왘 Press switch 1. Rear view mirrors
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 51).
The headlamps are cleaned with a
For more information on setting the rear
high-pressure water jet.
Headlamp cleaning system* view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 41).
For information on filling up the washer
The switch is located on the left side of the reservoir, see “Windshield washer system Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
dashboard. and headlamp cleaning system*” position
(컄 page 285).
1 Headlamp washer switch 1 Lever

왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). 왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night
position by moving lever 1 towards
the windshield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
168

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors*

The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and The automatic antiglare function does not Exercise care when using the passen-
the interior rear view mirror will respond react if incoming light is not aimed directly ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
automatically to glare when at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
앫 the ignition is switched on The interior rear view mirror and the exterior for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not are closer than they appear. Check your
and
react, for example, if the rear window interior rear view mirror or glance over your
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on shoulder before changing lanes.
sunshade* is in raised position.
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror. Glare can endanger you and others.
!
The rear view mirror will not react if Electrolyte drops coming into contact
앫 reverse gear R is engaged Warning! G with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
앫 the interior lighting is turned on
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte liquid state and by applying plenty of
may escape from the mirror housing if the water.
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
169

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror 왘 Make sure you have stored a parking The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
parking position* position for the passenger-side exterior previously stored driving position:
rear view mirror (컄 page 108).
Follow these steps to activate the mirror 앫 ten seconds after you put the gear
parking position so that the 왘 Make sure the Mirror set. parking selector lever out of position R
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror aid function in the Convenience
앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds
will be turned downward to the stored submenu of the control system is
a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
position. switched to On (컄 page 148).
앫 immediately when you press button 1
The buttons are located above the exterior 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). for the driver’s side mirror
lamp switch. 왘 Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror

button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
170

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors i
If sunlight enters through a side
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
window, disengage sun visor from
while driving.
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
The mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Mounting
can endanger you and others. 2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
왘 Swing sun visors down when you 4 Sun visor
experience glare.
왘 To use illuminated mirror, lift up
cover 2.
171

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade* 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).

Always raise the sunshade fully for its
Warning! G
The switch is located in the center console.
support against the window frame. When operating the rear window sunshade,
make sure there is no danger of anyone be-
Raising the sunshade ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce-
왘 Press switch 1 briefly. dure.
The sunshade is raised completely. The raising or lowering procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing the
Stopping the raising procedure switch.
왘 Press switch 1 again. Briefly press switch again to raise or lower

the rear window sunshade completely.
The sunshade stops.
1 Rear window sunshade switch
Lowering the sunshade
! Warning! G
왘 Press switch 1 briefly.
Make sure that the movement of the
rear window sunshade is not restricted When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
The sunshade is lowered completely.
by objects on the rear window shelf. SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
Otherwise, the sunshade or the objects vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
Stopping the lowering procedure
could be damaged. the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
왘 Press switch 1 again. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
The sunshade stops. ment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
172

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster Activating

왘 Press button F in the climate
Warning! G
The rear window defroster uses a large
control panel (컄 page 175). Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the The indicator lamp on the button removed from the rear window before
defroster as soon as the rear window is comes on. driving. Visibility could otherwise be
clear. The defroster is automatically impaired, endangering you and others.
deactivated after approximately Deactivating
6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on 왘 Press button F again. !
the outside temperature.
The indicator lamp on the button goes If the rear window defroster switches
out. off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
system responds automatically by
deactivating the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically turns itself back on.
173

Controls in detail
Climate control
174

Controls in detail
Climate control
Item i Item
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed For draft-free ventilation, move the 1 Air volume control
sliders for the side air vents 2 and 9
2 Left side air vent, adjustable and center air vents 5 and 6 to the 2 Left side temperature control
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control middle position. 3 Right side temperature control
for left side air vent 4 Air distribution control
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control 5 Rear window defroster
for left center air vent
6 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
7 Air distribution and air volume
6 Right center air vent, adjustable (automatic mode)
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control 8 Air recirculation
for right center air vent
9 Defrosting
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable Climate control panel
a Right side defroster vent, fixed
b Climate control panel
175

Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational when- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i
ever the engine is running. You can oper- odors are filtered out before outside air en- Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
ate the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through pollution) may require replacement of
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. the filter before its scheduled interval.
cools or heats the interior depending on A clogged filter will reduce the air
The air conditioning will not engage (no
the selected interior temperature and the
cooling) if the mode ACOFF is selected volume to the interior.
current outside temperature.
(컄 page 181). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
Warning! G Warning! G “Opening (Summer opening feature)”
(컄 page 229).
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
that enters the passenger compartment Keep the air intake grille in front of the
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
through the air vents in the footwell can be windshield free of snow and debris.
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
very hot or very cold (depending on the set Do not obstruct air flow by placing
impairing visibility and endangering you and
temperature). This may cause burns or frost- objects on the air flow-through exhaust
others.
bite on unprotected skin in the immediate slots below the rear window.
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the footwell air vents. If necessary,
change the air flow using the air distribution
controls to direct the air away from the foot-
well air vents (컄 page 178).
176

Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control Setting the temperature Increasing

system
왘 Turn temperature control 2 or 3
Use temperature controls 2 and 3
slightly to the right.
(컄 page 175) to separately adjust the air
Deactivating temperature on each side of the passenger The climate control system will corre-
왘 Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 175) compartment. You should raise or lower spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
to position 0. the temperature setting in small incre- perature.
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
i Decreasing
When the air conditioning is switched i
왘 Turn temperature control 2 or 3
off, the outside air supply and circula- When operating the climate control
slightly to the left.
tion are also switched off. Only choose system in automatic mode, you will
this setting for a short time. Otherwise only rarely need to adjust the tempera- The climate control system will corre-
the windows could fog up. ture, air volume and air distribution. spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Reactivating
왘 Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 175)
to any speed.
177

Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution and volume Adjusting manually Defrosting

왘 Press button U (컄 page 175).
Use air distribution control 4 i
(컄 page 175) to adjust the air distribution. The indicator lamp on the button goes
These settings should only be selected
The following symbols are found on the out.
for a short time.
controls: 왘 Select any of the six air volume speeds
Symbol Function and the air distribution. Activating
Z Directs air to the windshield
Adjusting automatically 왘 Press button P (컄 page 175).
and the side defroster vents
왘 Press button U (컄 page 175). The indicator lamp on the button
b Directs air into the entire comes on.
vehicle interior The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The temperature, air distri- The air conditioning switches
Y Directs air to the footwells automatically to the following functions:
bution and volume are adjusted auto-
a Directs air through the center, matically. 앫 maximum blowing and heating
side and rear passenger
power
compartment air vents Windshield fogged on the outside
앫 air flows onto the windshield and
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on the front side windows
Use the air volume control 1
(컄 page 51).
(컄 page 175) to adjust the air volume. You 앫 the air recirculation mode is
can select between six air volume speeds. 왘 Switch to manual mode. switched off
왘 Turn the air distribution control
to a or Y.
178

Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating i
왘 Press button P (컄 page 175).
Warning! G If you keep button , pressed the
side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
The indicator lamp on the button goes When the outside temperature is
will close.
out. Defrosting is turned off. below 41°F (5°C), only switch to air
recirculation mode for short periods to
Air recirculation mode prevent window fogging.
Warning! G
Window fogging may impair visibility and
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent endanger you and others. Never operate the side windows and the
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
Activating of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
intake of outside air and recirculates the
cedure.
air in the passenger compartment. 왘 Press button , (컄 page 175).
In the event that the closing procedure
The indicator lamp on the button causes potential danger, the closing of the
comes on. side windows can be immediately halted by
pressing or pulling the respective window
switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding
sunroof* can be immediately halted by
moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in
the overhead control panel in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the , button.
179

Controls in detail
Climate control
i Deactivating The air recirculation mode is deactivated

automatically:
The air recirculation mode is activated 왘 Press button , (컄 page 175).
automatically at high outside tempera- 앫 after five minutes if the outside
The indicator lamp on the button goes
tures. temperature is below
out.
The indicator lamp on the , button approximately 41°F (5°C)
is not lit when the air recirculation i 앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning
mode is automatically switched on. If you keep button , pressed the is turned off
side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
After approx. 30 minutes, outside air is 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside
will return to their previous position.
added to the air inside the vehicle. temperature is above
If you have turned off the air condi- approximately 41°F (5°C)
tioning (컄 page 181) or the outside At outside temperatures above 79°F
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the (26°C) the system will not automatically
air recirculation mode will not switch switch back to outside air. A quantity of
on automatically. outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
180

Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning Deactivating Activating

It is possible to deactivate the air condi- Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioning is operational while
tioning (cooling) function of the climate dehumidify the air with the air condition-
the engine is running and cools the interior
control system. The air in the vehicle will ing.
air to the temperature set by the operator.
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘 Press button ± (컄 page 175).
i 왘 Press button ± (컄 page 175). The indicator lamp on the button goes
Condensation may drip out from under-
The indicator lamp on the button out.
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
comes on.
not an indication of a malfunction. The air conditioning uses the
The cooling function switches off after refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free
a short delay. of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone
Warning! G layer.
If you turn off the cooling function, the !

vehicle will not be cooled when weather If the air conditioning cannot be turned
conditions are warm. The windows can fog on again, this indicates that the air
up more quickly. Window fogging may conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
impair visibility and endanger you and compressor has turned itself off.
others. Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
181

Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear passenger compartment The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution
adjustable air vents compartment are located in the rear
왘 Push the slide for the left center
center console.
vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
left, right, up or down.
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel (컄 page 175). The air flow is directed in the corre-
sponding direction.
i
The temperature at the center air vents i
for the rear passenger For draft-free ventilation, push
compartment 1 and 3 is the same as slides 1 and 3 upward.
at the dashboard center air vents.
Adjusting air volume
1 Left center air vent 왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents The air volume is increased or
3 Right center air vent decreased.
182

Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help

you become familiar with your Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They con-
tain useful tips and a detailed description Any alterations made to electronic
of the user functions. components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
Warning! G radio*, telephone* and voice control
system* are interconnected. When one of
In order to avoid distraction which could the components is not operational or has
lead to an accident, the driver should enter not been removed/replaced properly, the
system settings with the vehicle at a function of other components may be
standstill and operate the system only when impaired.
road and traffic conditions permit. Always This condition might seriously impair the
pay full attention to traffic conditions first operating safety of your vehicle.
before operating system controls while
We recommend that you have any service
driving.
work on electronic components carried out
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is
183

Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
184

Controls in detail
Audio system

1 CD changer mode selector 201 9 Speed dialing memory g Soft keys 186
(telephone) in descending h Volume 187
AUX mode selector 191
order
2 Single CD mode selector 203 j Switching on/off 186
a Accepting a call 213
3 Radio mode selector (telephone) k Manual tuning / seek 193
tuning (radio)
4 Mute function (radio) 195 b Telephone mode selector 208
Track search, reverse (CD) 206
Pause (CD) 207 c Speed dialing memory 209
5 Volume distribution 189 (telephone) in ascending l Manual tuning / seek 193
order tuning (radio)
6 Sound settings 187
d Terminating a call 213 Track search, 206
7 Display fast forward (CD)
(telephone)
8 Alphanumeric keypad
e CD slot
f CD ejection 203
185

Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation Operation i

If the radio is switched on without the
In these instructions, the alphanumeric
Switching the unit on/off key in the starter switch, it will
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
automatically switch off again after
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
Switching on approx. 30 minutes.
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch If your vehicle is equipped with a
“soft keys”. to position 1 or 2. telephone, the display may prompt you
to enter your PIN (GSM network) or
! 왘 If the audio system was on as you
code (TDMA or CDMA network).
removed the SmartKey from the starter
Do not press directly in the display
switch, the audio system will
face. Otherwise, the display will be
automatically come back on as you
damaged.
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2.
or
왘 Press M button.
186

Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching off i
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. If your vehicle equipment includes a
Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
or
telephone*, you can adjust its volume
왘 Press M button. separately from the volume of the
audio system while the telephone is
i being used.
Should excessively high temperatures
왘 Press + or – soft key to increase or
occur while the audio system is being Adjusting sound functions decrease tone level accordingly.
operated, the display will dim. If tem-
peratures continue to rise, HIGH TEMP The bass and treble functions are called up or
will appear in the display, after which by pressing the O button.
왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass
the audio system will be switched off Settings for bass and treble are stored tones to their center level.
for a cooling-down period. separately for the AM and FM wavebands,
The radio switches back to the
weather band, CD mode and telephone
standard radio menu eight seconds
Adjusting the volume mode.
after the last soft key is pressed.
왘 Turn rotary control of N button.
Bass
The volume will increase or decrease
왘 Press O button repeatedly until
depending on the direction turned.
BASS appears in the display.
187

Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting treble Sound system* 왘 Press X or Y soft key repeatedly

until the desired sound setting has
왘 Press O button repeatedly until You can either program the sound settings
been reached.
TREBLE appears in the display. manually (컄 page 187) or choose settings
via preset sound characteristics. The sound is set accordingly.
You can select from among the following or
settings: 왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
앫 STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.
The sound setting is reset depending
앫 SURROUND: the sound is set for better on the sound source activated.
three-dimensional acoustic character-
앫 Radio mode: STANDARD
istics.
왘 Press + or – soft key to increase or 앫 CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
decrease tone level accordingly. 앫 SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the
spoken word. 앫 Telephone: SPEECH
or
왘 Press O button repeatedly until The radio switches back to the
왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble
STANDARD, SURROUND or SPEECH appears standard radio menu eight seconds
tones to their center level.
in the display. after the last soft key is pressed.
standard radio menu eight seconds
after the last soft key is pressed.
188

Controls in detail
Audio system
Returning sound functions to factory Vehicles with sound system*:

settings
The sound setting is reset depending
왘 Press O button to call up settings on the sound source activated.
menu in the display.
앫 Radio mode: STANDARD
앫 CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
앫 Telephone: SPEECH
왘 Press V or W soft key.
standard radio menu four seconds The volume is distributed accordingly
after the last soft key is pressed. between the front and rear of the
vehicle.
왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the respec- Adjusting volume distribution
or
tive sound function is reset to its center Call up fader and balance functions by
level. 왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
pressing the P button.
or The fader is reset to its center level.
Fader The radio switches back to the
왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display. 왘 Press P button repeatedly until standard radio menu eight seconds
FADER appears in the display. after the last soft key is pressed.
The sound settings for bass and treble
are returned to their center level and
the volume is set to a predefined level.
189

Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting balance Returning volume distribution to 왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the
factory settings respective volume distribution is reset
왘 Press P button repeatedly until
to its center (flat) level.
BALANCE appears in the display. 왘 Press P button to call up settings
menu in the display. or
왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display.
The volume distribution settings for
fader and balance are set to their
center level.
왘 Press X or Y soft key.
standard radio menu four seconds
The volume is distributed between the after the last soft key is pressed.
left and right sides of the vehicle.
or Telephone* muting
왘 Press RES soft key briefly. If your vehicle equipment includes a

Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
The balance is reset to its center level. telephone*, you can adjust its volume
The radio switches back to the separately from the volume of the audio
standard radio menu eight seconds system while the telephone is being used.
after the last button is pressed.
190

Controls in detail
Audio system
Connecting an external audio source Radio operation Calling up wavebands for radios
(AUX) to the radio* without SAT
An optional dealer-installed cinch-connec- Selecting radio mode 왘 Press FM or AM soft key to switch
tor* for connecting an external audio between FM and AM.
왘 Press b button.
source may become available for your
The FM and AM wavebands are called
vehicle model. Feature description is
Calling up wavebands up one after another.
based on preliminary information at time
of printing. Contact an authorized You can choose from among the FM, AM or
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. and WB wavebands. 왘 Press WB soft key.
You can adjust the volume (컄 page 187), Weather band (컄 page 195). The weather band menu is called up.
the sound settings (컄 page 187) and the
volume distribution (컄 page 189) for the i The waveband currently selected
AUX input. FM waveband: 87.7......107.9 MHz appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
AM waveband: 530......1710 KHz
Calling up AUX mode
왘 Press and hold Q button until AUX
appears in the display.
Canceling AUX mode

왘 Press any audio source button.
191

Controls in detail
Audio system
Calling up wavebands for radios Selecting a station Direct frequency input

with SAT
The following options are available for 왘 Select desired waveband.
왘 Press FM, AM or WB soft key repeatedly selecting a station:
until desired waveband has been
앫 Direct frequency input (컄 page 192)
selected.
앫 Manual tuning (컄 page 193)
The FM, AM and WB wavebands are
called up one after another. 앫 Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 193)
The waveband currently selected 앫 Scan search (컄 page 193)
appears in the upper left-hand corner 앫 Station memory (컄 page 194)
of the display. 왘 Press * button.
앫 Automatic station memory (Autostore)
왘 Enter desired frequency with
(컄 page 194)
buttons 1 to R.
The station search proceeds in the
following frequency increments:
앫 200 kHz in FM range
앫 10 kHz in AM range
192

Controls in detail
Audio system
i Automatic seek tuning Scan search

You can only enter frequencies within 왘 Select desired waveband. 앫 Starting scan search
the respective waveband.
왘 Press S or T button briefly. 왘 Select desired waveband.
If a button is not pressed within
The radio will tune to the next highest
four seconds, the radio will return to
or next lowest receivable frequency.
the last station tuned.
i
Manual tuning If no station is received after two
왘 Select desired waveband. consecutive scans of the complete
frequency range, then the scan stops
왘 Press S or T button for approx.
at the frequency from which it began. 왘 Press SC soft key.
three seconds.
왘 Press button repeatedly until desired SC will appear in the display. The
frequency has been reached. radio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the waveband selected.
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order. Each
time the button is pressed, the radio
tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During
manual tuning, the radio is muted.
193

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Ending scan search 왘 Press and hold desired station 앫 Calling up Autostore memory level and
button 1 to R until a brief storing stations
왘 Press SC soft key or S or T.
signal tone is heard.
The station last played will be
The frequency is stored on the
selected and SC disappears from
selected station button.
the display.
앫 Calling up stations
Station memory 왘 Press desired station button 1
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations to R briefly.
in the memory.
왘 Press AS soft key briefly.
Autostore – automatic station memory
앫 Storing stations
The radio switches to the Autostore
The Autostore memory function provides
왘 Tune in desired station. memory level. AS and SEARCH
an additional memory level. The station
appear in the display and the radio
memory for manually stored stations is not
finds the ten stations with the
overwritten.
strongest signals. These stations
are stored on the station
buttons 1 to R in order of
signal strength.
194

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Calling up stations 앫 Mute on Selecting a weather band station

directly
왘 Press desired station button 1 왘 Press U button.
to R. 왘 Select desired weather band station
The radio mode is interrupted and
with buttons 1 to 7.
앫 Leaving the Autostore memory level MUTED appears in the display.
왘 Press FM or AM soft key briefly. 앫 Mute off If a station cannot be tuned in, a search
is automatically started.
왘 Press U button.
Interrupting radio mode
The radio mode is again active. Search
The radio mode is interrupted by an
왘 Press S or T button to tune in
incoming call on the telephone*
Weather band the next receivable weather band
(컄 page 213).
station.
i
If no weather band station is received
after three consecutive scans of the
complete frequency range, then the
scan stops at the channel with which it
began and NO WB FOUND appears in the
왘 Press WB soft key. display.
The weather band station last received
If this happens, switch back to
is tuned in.
standard radio mode.
195

Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan search Introduction to satellite radio* i

(USA only) At time of printing, no date for the avail-
앫 Starting scan search
ability of optional equipment required
왘 Press SC soft key. SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan-
for satellite radio operation had been
SC will appear in the display. The nels of digital-quality radio, among others
set.
radio briefly tunes in all receivable music, sports, news, and entertainment,
free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
weather band stations.
uses a fleet of high-power satellites to Center for details and availability for
앫 Ending scan search broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to your vehicle.
왘 Press SC soft key or S or T. coast. Note that categories and channels
The weather band station last This diverse, satellite-delivered program- shown in illustrations are dependent on
played will be selected and SC ming is available for a monthly subscrip- programming content delivered by the
disappears from the display. tion fee. service provider. Programming content
For more information call the SIRIUS is subject to change. Therefore,
Service Center (컄 page 201), or contact channels and categories shown in
www.siriusradio.com illustrations and descriptions
contained in this manual may differ
i from the channels and categories
Additional satellite radio equipment delivered by the service provider.
and a subscription to a satellite radio
service provider are required for the
satellite radio operation described
here. Feature description is based on
preliminary information available at
time of printing.
196

Controls in detail
Audio system
i Calling up the SAT main menu 왘 Press ESN soft key.

Satellite radio service may be unavail- 왘 Press SAT soft key. The twelve-digit electronic serial
able or interrupted from time to time number (ESN) of the SAT tuner*
SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand
for a variety of reasons, such as envi- installed in your vehicle is displayed.
corner of the display.
ronmental or topographic conditions
Prior to activation of the satellite radio This information is required to call the
and other things beyond the service
service (컄 page 197). SIRIUS Service Center for an activation
provider’s or our control. Service might
request.
also not be available in certain places After activation of satellite radio
(e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or service (컄 page 197). i
within or next to buildings) or near Credit card information may also be
other technologies. Prior to activation of the satellite radio required for your application.
service
Program categories The activation process takes approxi-
mately five to ten minutes after calling
The channels are categorized. Categories the SIRIUS Service Center.
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program (category mode)
After activation of the satellite radio
(컄 page 199).
service
The satellite radio main menu appears.
The radio station selected last is audible,
The telephone number of the SIRIUS provided it can be received.
Service Center (888-539-7474) is
displayed.
197

Controls in detail
Audio system
i Selecting a station Accessing via number keys

The system will tune to a default The following options are available: 왘 Enter number of preset you wish to
station if no station had been selected select, e.g. 1.
앫 Selecting a station using the selected
previously.
category (컄 page 199), The radio plays the station stored
앫 Tuning via station presets under this number and the PTY function
(컄 page 198), changes to the category corresponding
to the station.
앫 Tuning via scan search (컄 page 200).
앫 Tuning via manual channel input Tuning via manual channel input
(컄 page 198).
앫 Tuning via the program category list
(컄 page 199).
The first channel 001 is called up and the
PTY system changes to All categories. Tuning via station presets
If no station can be received, ACQUIRING Ten satellite radio station presets are
appears in the display. available.
Example: tuning in channel 16
If the Satellite radio service is not You can access the presets via number
activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the keys.
radio display and NO SAT will appear in the
198

Controls in detail
Audio system
왘 Press *. 앫 Selecting a category The system will automatically switch to

a station of the selected category if the
Input line appears in the main radio 왘 Press PTY soft key.
currently selected station is not of the
menu.
selected category. Otherwise, the
왘 Use number keys to enter desired currently selected station remains
channel within eight seconds, tuned.
e.g. 1 6.
앫 Tuning a station within the selected
The system tunes to channel 16. category
The station you have selected begins to The channels identified for the
play. currently selected category are
The current PTY category of the
station is displayed. arranged numerically. Only one entry is
i visible at a time.
You can only enter available channel 왘 Press <<< or >>> soft key.
numbers. 왘 Press S or T button briefly.
This switches between the
individual categories. The next station within the category
Tuning via the program category list is started.
When changing the category, the
The category list contains all currently channel selected last in the new or
receivable categories of programs. It is category becomes audible. 왘 Press and hold S or T
arranged alphabetically. button for approx. three seconds
until desired station has been
reached.
199

Controls in detail
Audio system
Tuning via scan search Obtaining additional text information Storing stations
Scan search is characterized as follows: Additional text information (artist, title) 왘 Tune in desired station.
related to the current channel can be
앫 Scan search plays a channel for 왘 Press and hold desired station
displayed.
approx. eight seconds and then skips button 1 to R until a brief signal
to the next channel within the current 왘 Press INF soft key. tone is heard.
category. The title being played is displayed. The frequency is stored on the selected
앫 Scan search can be terminated station button.
왘 Press INF soft key again.
manually.
The radio saves the current station at
The name of the artist performing the
왘 Press SC soft key. the memory preset selected. The
title being played is displayed.
memory preset selected appears in the
The search starts. SC appears in the
i status line, e.g. S3.
display.
If a button is not pressed within
왘 Press SC soft key again. i
four seconds, the radio will return to
The search stops. the standard display. There are ten presets available.
An existing entry is overwritten in the
memory list when a new entry is given.
200

Controls in detail
Audio system
Calling up the ESN information menu CD mode

왘 Press INF soft key.
Warning! G
왘 Press ESN soft key. Safety precautions In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should insert
The twelve-digit electronic serial
number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* Warning! G CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted
installed in your vehicle is displayed.
The single CD player and the CD changer* by road, weather and traffic conditions.
왘 Press RET soft key to exit the menu. are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
of invisible laser radiation if the housing is (approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a
opened or damaged. distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
Do not open the housing. The single CD every second.
player and the CD changer* do not contain
any parts that can be serviced by the user. General notes
For safety reasons, have any service work
which may be necessary performed only by The system may not be able to play audio
qualified personnel. CDs with copy protection.
Playing copied CDs may cause
malfunctions during playback.
201

Controls in detail
Audio system
! Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter, Tips on handling CDs

If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can not even with a CD adapter. Attempting to
앫 Handle CDs carefully to prevent
become warped due to the heat that play CDs with an eight cm diameter or
interference during playback.
develops in the CD drive or playing such CDs with an adapter may
cause damage to the CD drive. Such 앫 Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust
CD changer.
damage is not covered by the on the CDs.
In certain situations, the CDs can then
no longer be ejected and cause Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 앫 Do not write on CDs or apply any labels
damage to the drive. Such damage is Should excessively high or low tempera- or other material to them.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz tures occur while in CD changer mode*, 앫 Clean CDs from time to time with a
Limited Warranty. CD TEMP will appear in the display, and the commercially available cleaning cloth.
CD will be muted until the temperature has Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;
! reached an acceptable level for the system instead, wipe it in a straight line start-
Your CD drive or CD changer has been to continue operation. ing in the center and moving outward.
designed to play CDs which The single CD player and the CD changer* Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays,
correspond to the EN 60908 standard. play audio CDs. etc. for cleaning.
You can therefore only use CDs with a 앫 Replace the CD in its case after use.
maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
앫 Protect CDs from heat and direct
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. sunlight.
ones that have data on both sides (one
side with DVD data, the other side with
audio data), they cannot be ejected and
will damage the drive.
202

Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating the single CD player in the i Operational readiness of CD changer*

audio system unit If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or If a CD changer* has been installed in the
cannot be read, WRONG CD0 will appear vehicle, it can be operated from the front
Loading a CD in the display. control panel of the audio system.
The single CD player in the audio system A loaded magazine must be installed to
unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot Ejecting a CD play CDs.
for loading the drive is located underneath
왘 Make sure the system is switched on. The CD changer is located in the glove box.
the soft keys.
왘 Press EJECT button.
왘 Make sure the system is switched on. Loading/unloading the CD magazine
The system ejects the CD. NO CD will
왘 Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of
appear in the display. i
the CD must face upwards.
The CD changer* may not be able to
왘 Remove CD from slot.
The system automatically pulls the CD play audio CDs with copy protection.
into the CD slot. The audio CD begins i
to play. 왘 Slide changer door to the right and
If you do not take the CD out of the CD
slot within approx. 15 seconds, the press g button.
!
system automatically pulls the CD back 왘 Magazine will be ejected.
If a CD is already loaded, it must be
in and plays it.
ejected before inserting a new CD.
Inserting a second CD in the slot with If a CD is pulled back in, press
another CD still loaded will cause dam- EJECT button for five seconds; the CD
age to the CD drive not covered by the will then be ejected.
203

Controls in detail
Audio system
왘 Push tray into magazine in direction of CD changer*

arrow.
왘 Press Q button.
i CD and the selected magazine slot
CDs which have been inserted number appear in the upper left-hand
improperly or are unreadable will not corner of the display.
be played. If you have not removed a CD since the last
time the CD audio source was activated,
왘 Push magazine into CD changer* 2 in the last CD listened to will begin to play at
direction of arrow and close sliding the point where it was switched off.
1 CD door.
2 CD changer After the last track on a CD has finished,
3 CD tray the next CD is automatically played.
Playing CDs
4 CD magazine
왘 Remove magazine 4 and pull Single CD player in the audio unit
CD tray 3 fully out. 왘 Press i button.
왘 Place CD 1 in recess of tray, label side CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand
up. corner of the display.
The CD will resume playback at the point
where it was switched off.
204

Controls in detail
Audio system
Playing tracks Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD i

changer* If there is no CD in the selected
You have the following options:
magazine slot, NO CD appears in the
앫 Audio system with CD changer*:
display with the corresponding slot
selecting CDs
number.
앫 Direct track entry
앫 Track skip forward/reverse Direct track entry
앫 Fast forward/reverse
앫 Scan 왘 You can select from among the
앫 Random tracks inserted CDs with buttons
R to 6.
앫 Repeat track
R = CD player in the audio unit
1 to 6 = CDs in the
CD changer* You can make a direct selection from
The magazine slot number of the among the tracks on a CD.
selected CD appears next to CD in the 왘 Press * button.
display, and the number of the
왘 Enter track number using buttons 1
currently played track appears next
to R. 컄컄
to TRACK.
205

Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄 The number of the track being played Fast forward/reverse Scan

appears next to TRACK in the display.
앫 Fast forward 앫 Starting scan
You can only enter available track
왘 Press and hold S button until 왘 Press SC soft key.
numbers.
desired point has been reached. SC will appear in the display.
Skipping tracks forward/backward 앫 Reverse
Each track on the current CD will be
앫 Skipping tracks forward 왘 Press and hold T button until played for approx. eight seconds in
desired point has been reached. ascending order.
왘 Press S button briefly.
i 앫 Ending scan
The next track will be played.
The track number and the relative time 왘 Press SC soft key or T or S.
앫 Skipping tracks backward
of the track is shown in the display
왘 Press T button briefly. during the search. Random play
If the track has been playing for The random function (RDM) plays the
more than ten seconds, the unit tracks of the current CD in random order.
skips back to the beginning of the
track currently playing. If less than i
ten seconds have been played, the When you start the RDM function, the
unit skips back to the beginning of RPT function is automatically switched
the previous track. off.
Pressing the T or S button
repeatedly will result in multiple tracks
being skipped.
206

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Switching on random 앫 Switching on repeat 앫 Switching on pause function

왘 Press RDM soft key. 왘 Press RPT soft key.
RDM appears in the display. RPT appears in the display.
A randomly selected track is 앫 Switching off repeat
played.
왘 Press RPT soft key again.
앫 Switching off random
왘 Press RDM soft key again. Pause function
왘 Press U button.
The CD changer mode is interrupted by an
Repeat
incoming call on the telephone* The CD changer mode is
The track being played is repeated until the (컄 page 213). interrupted and PAUSE appears in
repeat function is switched off. the display.
앫 Switching off pause function
i
When you start the RPT function, the 왘 Press U button.
RDM function is automatically The CD changer mode is active
switched off. again.
207

Controls in detail
Audio system
Track and time display GSM network phones Switching on the telephone
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified Switching on the telephone

mobile telephone*, a number of functions
왘 Press h button.
and operating steps can be performed and
displayed in the audio system display. If the telephone was previously
switched off, PROCESSING appears in
Further operating instructions not covered
the display and you will then be
here can be found in the operating instruc-
prompted to enter your PIN.
왘 Press T soft key. tions for the multifunction steering wheel
and the cellular telephone*.
The number of the track being played Switching off the telephone
If your audio system is set up for telephone
and the elapsed playing time appear in 왘 Press h button for approx. three
the display. operation, the t symbol will appear in
seconds.
the display.
왘 Press T soft key again. PROCESSING appears in the display until
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
The total number of tracks and the total the telephone is off. Afterward,
specified mobile telephone* into the
playing time of the CD appear in the PHONE OFF appears in the display.
telephone cradle, you will be prompted to
display. enter your PIN for 30 seconds
왘 Press T soft key. (컄 page 209). This display disappears
when you press any button.
The standard CD playback menu
appears in the display. When your mobile telephone is inserted
into the telephone cradle, you will see the
reception strength in the upper right-hand
208

Controls in detail
Audio system
PIN entry i Placing a call

If the PIN is entered incorrectly three
times, NEED PUK will appear in the Entering a telephone number and
display. Enter PUK via your telephone. starting the dialing process
Please refer to the separate telephone
operating instructions for more
information.
왘 Enter PIN number using buttons 1 Adjusting the volume

to R. 왘 Turn rotary control of N button
왘 If necessary, correct number entered during a telephone call.
왘 Enter desired telephone number using
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key The volume will increase or decrease buttons 1 to R.
briefly to delete the last digit entered; depending on the direction turned.
press soft key and hold to delete the The number can have up to 32 digits,
complete number. i but only twelve of these are visible in
The volume can be adjusted separately the display. 컄컄
왘 Press OK soft key after entering correct
PIN. for telephone mode and audio mode.
왘 READY or ROAMING will appear in the

Adjusting sound
display.
왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Sound adjustment (컄 page 187).
209

Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄왘 If necessary, correct number entered i 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key This is only possible, however, when button ‚ or ƒ.
briefly to delete the last digit entered; the call information transmitted 왘 Press desired numerical key 2
press soft key and hold to delete the includes the number of the person to 9.
complete number. calling. If the telephone number is not
The stored entries are selected
왘 After correct telephone number has transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored
according to the alphabetical order
been entered, press s button. in the phone book.
of the initial letters (e.g. for
i S -Schneider, press button 7
앫 Searching and calling up telephone four times).
If the telephone number has been book entries by name
saved together with a name in the or
You can access your mobile
telephone book, the name will appear 왘 Press and hold button ‚
telephone’s phone book using the
in the display. or ƒ.
audio system. You can access both the
main entries and the sub-entries of The system jumps from one initial
Phone book
your phone book. letter to the next in ascending or
The numbers stored in the phone book of descending order.
the telephone can be called up either by
왘 Press and hold button ‚
name or number.
or ƒ until desired initial letter
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the has been reached.
phone book.
or
210

Controls in detail
Audio system
왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
repeatedly until desired entry has press s button. button ‚ or ƒ.
been reached.
The call will be made. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls).
The stored entries are selected in
앫 Viewing the telephone number of a The number of received calls and
alphabetical order with the
telephone book entry then the call last received appear
sub-entries.
왘 Search for desired entry. briefly in the display.
i 왘 Select desired telephone number
왘 Press NUM soft key.
Several sub-entries can be stored for with button ‚ or ƒ.
each main entry (name). These entries The telephone number of the phone
The letter R and the number of the
are marked by a corresponding book entry appears in the display.
memory position appear in the
abbreviation that appears in the upper 앫 Returning calls received upper left-hand corner of the
left-hand corner of the display. The display. The numbers are stored in
following abbreviations for sub-entries the order of the calls received.
are possible:
왘 When you have selected a number,
CEL = Mobile phone press s button.
HOM = Home
WOR = Work The call will be made.
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main
211

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Speed dial Redial 왘 Press s button.

If you have stored telephone numbers If the number you have dialed is busy, you The telephone number last dialed
as speed dial numbers in your can again place calls to the last ten will appear in the display.
telephone, you can also enter these telephone numbers dialed using the redial
왘 Select desired telephone number
with buttons 1 to R on the radio function.
with button ‚ or ƒ.
head unit.
i The letter L and the number of the
왘 Press desired button 1 to R memory position appears in the
If you have activated the automatic
briefly. left-hand corner of the display. The
redial function on your telephone, the
왘 Press s button. number of the person being called is numbers are stored in the order of
automatically redialed after a short the calls received.
The call will be made.
waiting period if there is a busy signal. 왘 When you have selected a number,
앫 Turbo dial Refer to the separate operating press s button.
If you have stored telephone numbers instructions for the mobile telephone.
as turbo dial numbers in your The call will be made.
telephone, you can also enter these 앫 Manual redial
with buttons 1 to R on the radio
head unit.
왘 Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
212

Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call Muting a call Talking with two callers at the same
time
If the telephone is active in the background It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
(reception symbol is visible in the display), then no longer able to hear you. If you wish to receive or place another call
the audio source is muted when an incom- during an already active call, you can
앫 Mute on
ing call is received. A ringing tone can be accept or place the second call and switch
heard and the caller’s telephone number, 왘 Press MUT soft key. between the callers or combine them into
or the name under which the telephone 왘 MIC MUTE will appear in the display. one call. Note that the features described
number has been saved in the phone book, here are depending on availability from
appears in the display. If the caller’s 앫 Mute off your mobile phone service provider.
number is not transmitted with the call, 왘 Press MUT soft key again. 앫 Placing/accepting a second call
CALL will appear in the display.
Terminating a call 왘 Place new call by entering
왘 Press s button. telephone number manually.
The call is accepted. 왘 Press t button.
왘 Press s button.
The current call is terminated and the
muted audio source becomes active You are connected to the second
again. caller; the first caller is kept on
hold.
or 컄컄
213

Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄 왘 Press s button to accept a 앫 Terminating a call TDMA or CDMA network phones

second call.
왘 Press t button.
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified
i The current call is terminated. You mobile telephone*, a number of functions
You will be notified of the second call are again connected with the caller and operating steps can be performed and
acoustically, but you will not see this in previously placed on hold. displayed in the audio system display.
the display. 앫 Combining two calls Further operating instructions not covered
왘 Press 3 and s buttons. here can be found in the operating instruc-
You are connected with the second tions for the multifunction steering wheel
caller; the first caller is kept on hold. The calls are combined into one and the mobile telephone*.
앫 Switching between calls call.
If your audio system is set up for telephone
앫 Terminating a combined call operation, the t symbol will appear in
왘 Press 2 and s buttons.
왘 Press t button. the display.
This switches between the calls.
The non-active call is kept on hold. The connection to both callers is When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
terminated. specified mobile telephone* into the
telephone cradle, you will be prompted to
enter your PIN for 30 seconds
(컄 page 215). This display disappears
when you press any button.
When your mobile telephone is inserted
into the telephone cradle, you will see the
reception strength in the upper right-hand
214

Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching on the telephone 왘 Press OK soft key after entering correct Adjusting sound
code.
왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Switching on the telephone
The telephone is unlocked. If you have Sound adjustment (컄 page 187).
왘 Press h button. entered an incorrect code, you must
enter the correct code. Placing a call
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must now
Switching off the telephone Entering a telephone number and
enter the code.
starting the dialing process
왘 Press h button for approx. three
seconds.
PROCESSING appears in the display until
the telephone is off. Afterward,
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
Adjusting the volume

왘 Enter code using buttons 1 왘 Turn rotary control of N button
왘 Enter desired telephone number using
to R. during a telephone call.
buttons 1 to R.
왘 If necessary, correct number entered The volume will increase or decrease
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key The number can have up to 32 digits,
depending on the direction turned.
briefly to delete the last digit entered; but only twelve of these are visible in
the display. 컄컄
press soft key and hold to delete the i
complete number. The volume can be adjusted separately
for telephone mode and audio mode.
215

Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄왘 If necessary, correct number entered i 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key This is only possible, however, when button ‚ or ƒ.
briefly to delete the last digit entered; the call information transmitted 왘 Press desired numerical key 2
press soft key and hold to delete the includes the number of the person to 9.
complete number. calling. If the telephone number is not
The stored entries are selected
왘 After correct telephone number has transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored
according to the alphabetical order
been entered, press s button. in the phone book.
of the initial letters (e.g. for
i S -Schneider, press button 7
앫 Searching and calling up phone book four times).
If the telephone number has been entries by name
saved together with a name in the or
You can access your mobile
phone book, the name will appear in 왘 Press and hold button ‚
telephone’s phone book with the audio
the display. or ƒ.
system. You can access both the main
entries and the sub-entries of your The system jumps from one initial
Phone book
phone book. letter to the next in ascending or
The numbers stored in the phone book of descending order.
the mobile telephone can be called up
왘 Press and hold button ‚
either by name or number.
or ƒ until desired initial letter
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the has been reached.
phone book.
or
216

Controls in detail
Audio system
왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
repeatedly until desired entry has press s button. button ‚ or ƒ.
been reached.
The call will be made. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls).
The stored entries are selected in
앫 Viewing the telephone number of a The number of received calls and
alphabetical order with the
phone book entry then the call last received appear
sub-entries.
왘 Search for desired entry. briefly in the display.
i 왘 Select desired telephone number
왘 Press NUM soft key.
Several sub-entries can be stored for with button ‚ or ƒ.
each main entry (name). These entries The telephone number of the phone
The letter R and the number of the
are marked by a corresponding book entry appears in the display.
memory position appear in the
abbreviation that appears in the upper 앫 Returning calls received upper left-hand corner of the
left-hand corner of the display. The display. The numbers are stored in
following abbreviations for sub-entries the order of the calls received.
are possible:
왘 When you have selected a number,
CEL = Mobile phone press s button.
HOM = Home
WOR = Work The call will be made.
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main
217

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Speed dial Redial 왘 Press s button.

If you have stored telephone numbers If the number you have dialed is busy, you The telephone number last dialed
as speed dial numbers in your can again place calls to the last ten will appear in the display.
telephone, you can also enter these telephone numbers dialed using the redial
왘 Select desired telephone number
with buttons 1 to R on the radio function.
with button ‚ or ƒ.
unit.
i The letter L and the number of the
왘 Press desired button 1 to R memory position appears in the
If you have activated the automatic re-
briefly. left-hand corner of the display. The
dial function on your mobile telephone,
왘 Press s button. the number of the person being called numbers are stored in the order of
is automatically redialed after a short the calls received.
The call will be made.
waiting period if there is a busy signal. 왘 When you have selected a number,
앫 Turbo dial Refer to the separate operating instruc- press s button.
If you have stored telephone numbers tions for the mobile telephone.
as turbo dial numbers in your The call will be made.
telephone, you can also enter these 앫 Manual redial
with buttons 1 to R on the radio
unit.
왘 Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
218

Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call Muting a call Accepting a second incoming call

If the telephone is active in the background It is possible to mute a call; the caller is If you receive another call during an
(reception symbol is visible in the display), then no longer able to hear you. already active call, you can accept the
the audio source is muted when an incom- second call and switch between the two.
앫 Mute on
ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
앫 Accepting a second call
heard and the caller’s telephone number, 왘 Press MUT soft key.
or the name under which the telephone 왘 Place new call by entering
왘 MIC MUTE will appear in the display.
number has been saved in the telephone telephone number manually.
book, appears in the display. If the caller’s 앫 Mute off
number is not relayed, CALL will appear in
i
왘 Press MUT soft key again.
the display. You will be notified of the second call
Terminating a call acoustically, but you will not see this in
왘 Press s button. the display.
The call is accepted. 왘 Press t button.
The current call is terminated and the You are connected to the second
muted audio source becomes active caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
again.
219

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Switching between calls Placing a second call 앫 Terminating a call

왘 Press s button. If you wish to place another call during an 왘 Press t button.
already active call, you can place the
This switches between the calls. The current call is terminated. The
second call and switch between the callers
The non-active call is kept on hold. connection to the caller previously
or combine them into one call. Note that
앫 Terminating a call kept on hold is also interrupted;
this feature is depending on availability
however, reconnection is indicated
왘 Press t button. from your mobile phone service provider.
by an acoustic signal.
The current call is terminated. The 앫 Placing a second call 앫 Combining two calls
connection to the caller previously 왘 Place a new call by entering
왘 Press s button.
kept on hold is also interrupted; telephone number manually.
however, reconnection is indicated The calls are combined into one
왘 Press s button.
by an acoustic signal. call.
You are connected to the second 앫 Terminating a combined call
caller; the first caller is kept on
hold. 왘 Press t button.
The connection to both callers is
terminated.
220

Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency calls “911” The following conditions must be met for a GSM network phones
“911” emergency call:
The following describes how to dial a “911” Placing a “911” emergency call using
앫 Telephone must be switched on.
emergency call using the audio system audio head unit with the phone locked
head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified 앫 The corresponding mobile communica-
왘 Press h button to switch to
mobile phone* is inserted in the phone tions network must be available.
telephone operation.
cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the
descriptions refer to the audio system i PIN? appears in the audio display.
head unit. Emergency calls may not be possible
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on
with all telephone networks or if certain
Consult the separate telephone operating the audio head unit.
network services and/or telephone
instructions that came with your mobile 왘 Press OK soft key or s button for
functions are active. Check with your
phone* for information on how to place a dialing to begin.
local service providers.
“911” emergency call on the mobile
phone*. DIALING appears in the audio display
If you cannot make an emergency call, you while the telephone establishes the
will have to initiate rescue measures connection.
Warning! G yourself.
왘 Wait until the emergency call center
The “911” emergency call system is a public answers, then describe the emergency.
service. Using it without due cause is a crim-
inal offense.
221

Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call using TDMA/CDMA network phones Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone audio head unit with the phone
unlocked Placing a “911” emergency call using unlocked
audio head unit with the phone locked
왘 Press h button to switch to 왘 Press h button to switch to
telephone operation. 왘 Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
telephone operation.
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit. CODE? appears in the audio display. the audio head unit.
왘 Press s button for dialing to begin. 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on 왘 Press s button for dialing to begin.
the audio head unit.
DIALING appears in the audio display DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the 왘 Press OK soft key or s button for while the telephone establishes the
connection. dialing to begin. connection.
왘 Wait until the emergency call center DIALING appears in the audio display 왘 Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency. while the telephone establishes the answers, then describe the emergency.
connection.
i
왘 Wait until the emergency call center
If no SIM card is in the mobile phone,
answers, then describe the emergency.
NO SERVICE appears in the audio
display. In that case, you only can make
an emergency call on the mobile phone
itself, without the use of the head unit.
222

Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning! G If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
The side windows can be opened and
When closing the windows, make sure there you are closing the window by pulling and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the holding the switch, or by pressing and hold-
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
closing procedure. ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, the auto-
switches for the respective windows are
matic reversal function will not operate.
on the front passenger door and the rear The closing of the door windows can be im-
doors. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
if switch was pulled past the resistance SmartKey from starter switch, take it with
point and released, by either pressing or you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave
pulling the respective switch. children unattended in the vehicle, or with
If the window encounters an obstruction vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an
that blocks its path in a circumstance where accident and/or serious personal injury.
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
1 Left front window

2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 75)
223

Controls in detail
Power windows
i Opening the windows Fully opening the windows

You can also open or close the (Express-open)
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
windows using the SmartKey (summer point. 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 past the
opening/convenience closing feature) resistance point and release.
The corresponding window will move
(컄 page 225).
downwards until you release the The corresponding window opens
You can close and reopen the windows switch. completely.
using the air recirculation button ,
in the climate control panel Closing the windows Fully closing the windows
(컄 page 175). (Express-close)
왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
point. 왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 past the
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). resistance point and release.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window closes
completely.
Warning! G
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruc-
tion including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
224

Controls in detail
Power windows
! Opening and closing the windows with

If the upward movement of the window Warning! G the SmartKey
is blocked during the closing The tilt/sliding sunroof* (컄 page 229) will
Driver’s door only:
procedure, the window will stop and also be opened or closed when the power
If within five seconds you again pull the
open slightly. windows are operated with the SmartKey .
switch past the resistance point and
Remove the obstruction, pull the release, the automatic reversal will not
switch again past the resistance point function. Warning! G
and release.
If the window still does not close when Stopping windows Never operate the windows or tilt/sliding
there is no obstruction, then pull and sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone
왘 Press or pull respective switch again. being harmed by the opening or closing pro-
hold the switch again. The side window
will then close without the obstruction cedure.
sensor function In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the
transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse
direction of movement, press button Œ
for opening or ‹ for closing.
225

Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing power windows

왘 Press and hold button ‹ after
The power windows must be
locking the vehicle.
resynchronized each time
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
앫 after the battery has been
begin to close after approximately one
disconnected.
second.
앫 if the power windows cannot be fully
왘 Release the ‹ button to stop
opened (Express-open) or closed
procedure.
(Express-close).
왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door Make sure all side windows and the
handle. tilt/sliding sunroof* are properly closed
before leaving the vehicle. 왘 Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed.
Opening (Summer opening feature)
Hold the switches for approximately
왘 Press and hold button Œ after
one second.
unlocking the vehicle.
The power windows are synchronized.
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
begin to open after approximately one
second.
왘 Release the Œ button to stop
procedure.
226

Controls in detail
왔 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Opening and closing the power With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and sunroof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the sure there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel. The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any
direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
Screen
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
Sunroof switch In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing

their seat belts or not wearing them properly
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
opening also presents a potential for injury
3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
for occupants wearing their seat belts
4 Push back to slide sunroof open
properly as entire body parts or portions of
them may protrude from the passenger
compartment. 컄컄
227

Controls in detail
컄컄 i Opening and closing the power

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey 왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked (summer opening/convenience closing tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- feature) (컄 page 229). switch to resistance point in the
ment can cause an accident and/or serious You can close and reopen the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
personal injury. tilt/sliding sunroof using the air Release the sunroof switch when the
recirculation button , in the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
! climate control panel (컄 page 175). desired position.
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). Fully opening (Express-open) and
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding closing (Express-close) the power
sunroof. tilt/sliding sunroof
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this sunroof, move the sunroof switch past
could result in malfunctions. the resistance point in the required
direction of arrow 4 or 3 and
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened
release.
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 341). The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.
228

Controls in detail
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power
during Express-operation tilt/sliding sunroof with the SmartKey
왘 Move the sunroof switch in any The power windows (컄 page 225) will also
direction. be opened or closed when you operate the
tilt/sliding sunroof with the SmartKey .
i
If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
Warning! G
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will
Never operate the windows or tilt/sliding
stop and reopen slightly.
sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone 왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
being harmed by the opening or closing pro- handle.
cedure.
In the event that the procedure causes Opening (Summer opening feature)
potential danger, the procedure can be 왘 Press and hold button Œ after
immediately halted by releasing the unlocking the vehicle.
transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse
direction of movement, press button Œ The windows and the tilt/sliding
for opening or ‹ for closing. sunroof begin to open after
approximately one second.
왘 Release the Œ button to stop
procedure.
229

Controls in detail
Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).
sunroof
왘 Press and hold button ‹ after 왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in
locking the vehicle. the direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 227)
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
The windows and the tilt/sliding synchronized
raised at the rear.
sunroof begin to close after
앫 after the battery has been
approximately one second. Hold the sunroof switch for
disconnected or discharged
왘 Release the ‹ button to stop approximately one second.
앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
procedure. 왘 Check the Express-open feature
closed manually (컄 page 341)
(컄 page 228).
Make sure all side windows and the
앫 after a malfunction
tilt/sliding sunroof are properly closed If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
before leaving the vehicle. 앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open completely, the tilt/sliding sunroof is
smoothly synchronized. Otherwise repeat the
above steps.
230

Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is Cruise control
described on the following pages: Warning! G
Cruise control automatically maintains the
앫 Cruise control, with which the vehicle
speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de-
can maintain a preset speed signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
Use of cruise control is recommended for
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP eration. The driver is and must remain at all
driving at a constant speed for extended
driving systems, see “Driving safety sys- times responsible for the vehicle speed and
periods of time. You can set or resume
tems” (컄 page 77). for safe brake operation.
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h). Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
means of the cruise control lever.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
lever on the left-hand side of the steering because conditions do not allow safe
column (컄 page 22). driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
231

Controls in detail
Driving systems
i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Vehicles with automatic transmission:
control may not be able to maintain the Moving the gear selector lever to
set speed. Once the grade eases, the position N while driving also cancels
set speed will be resumed. cruise control. However, the gear
selector lever should not be moved to
Canceling cruise control position N while driving, except to
coast when the vehicle is in danger of
There are several ways to cancel cruise skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
control:
1 Sets current or higher speed 왘 Step on the brake pedal.
2 Sets current or lower speed
i
3 Cancels cruise control Cruise control is canceled. The last Vehicles with manual transmission:
4 Resumes at last set speed speed set is stored for later use. The set cruise controlled speed is
or switched off when declutching exceeds
Setting current speed four seconds during downshifting a
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to gear.
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired position 3.
speed.
Cruise control is canceled. The last i
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise speed set is stored for later use. The last stored speed is canceled when
control lever. you turn off the engine.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
232

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed i Setting to last stored speed

Vehicles with automatic transmission: (“Resume” function)
왘 Lift cruise control lever to position 1
and hold it up until the desired speed is When you use the cruise control lever
reached. to decelerate, the transmission will Warning! G
automatically downshift if the engine’s
왘 Release cruise control lever.
braking power does not brake the The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set. vehicle sufficiently. set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i Fine adjustment in 1 mph differences arising from returning to preset
Depressing the accelerator pedal does (Canada: 1 km/h) increments speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
not deactivate cruise control. After ous injury to you and others.
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), Faster
cruise control will resume the last
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in 왘 Briefly push cruise control lever to
speed set.
direction of arrow 1. position 4.
Setting a lower speed The cruise control resumes the last set
Slower speed.
왘 Depress cruise control lever to
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached. direction of arrow 2. pedal.
왘 Release cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.
233

Controls in detail
Loading
Roof rack* 왘 Only mount the roof rack between the Ski sack* (Canada only)
fastening points (see arrows).
왘 Secure the roof rack according to
Warning! G manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to !
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manu-
Load the roof rack in such a way that
facturer’s installation instructions.
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Make sure
1 Handle
앫 you can fully raise the tilt/sliding
2 Cover
sunroof*.
3 Armrest
앫 you can fully open the trunk.
Unfolding and loading
왘 Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
왘 Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2
down.
234

Controls in detail
Loading
4 Hook and loop fastener 5 Button 왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
왘 Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4. 왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Pull ski sack into passenger compart- 왘 Press button 5. Warning! G
ment and unfold. The flap opens downward. The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants. 컄컄
235

Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄 Unloading and folding

왘 Loosen the straps.
왘 Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
왘 Unload skis.
왘 Close flap in trunk.
왘 Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
왘 Place folded ski sack inside recess of
backrest.
6 Strap 7 Hook
8 Eye 왘 Fasten hook and loop fastener.
왘 Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack 왘 Connect hook 7 to eye 8. 왘 Close ski sack compartment cover.
are tightly secured.
Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).
236

Controls in detail
Loading
Removing the ski sack Split rear bench seat*

You can remove the ski sack for cleaning
Warning! G
To expand the cargo area, you can fold
or drying. Never drive vehicle with trunk open while down the left and right rear seat backrests.
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
The two sections can be folded down
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
separately.
terior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
Warning! G
i When expanding the luggage area, always
To prevent unauthorized persons from fold the seat cushions fully forward.
accessing the trunk, always close the
Unless you are transporting cargo, the
flap.
backrests must remain properly locked in
1 Button
the upright position.
2 Ski sack frame Installing the ski sack
3 Flap In an accident, during hard braking or
Install the ski sack in the reverse order. sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause
왘 Press button 1. inward until the ski sack frame snaps injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
into place. are securely fastened in the vehicle.
The flap 3 opens downward.
왘 Close flap 3. Always use the cargo tie down rings*
왘 Press button 1 firmly until ski sack
(컄 page 240).
frame 2 is released. 왘 Close trunk lid.
왘 Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
out.
237

Controls in detail
Loading
Folding the backrest forward Returning the backrest to original

position
The release handle 1 is located in the
trunk.
왘 Pull release handle 2.

왘 Fold seat cushion 3 forward.
왘 Fold backrest 2 rearward until it
왘 Fold backrest 4 forward. engages.
왘 Pull release handle 1.
왘 Fold seat cushion 1 rearward until it
왘 Fully retract and fold rearward head
locks into position.
restraints (컄 page 102).
238

Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions
Warning! G
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, cargo is
being carried in the trunk, or the extended
cargo compartment is not in use. Check for
If the backrest is not locked into position, secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
a red indicator 3 will be visible. backrest.
The total load weight including vehicle oc-
왘 Check for secure locking by pushing In an accident, during hard braking or sud- cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-
and pulling on the backrest. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury on the corresponding label located on the
to vehicle occupants unless the items are driver’s door pillar.
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
To help avoid personal injury during a ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care tribution. It is therefore recommended to
when transporting cargo. load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
i placed towards the front of the vehicle.
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always lock
backrest in its upright position.
239

Controls in detail
Loading
Always place items being carried against Cargo tie-down rings*

front or rear seat backrests, and fasten Warning! G
them as securely as possible. The four cargo tie-down rings are located
Always fasten items being carried as secure- in the trunk.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al- ly as possible.
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
fluences the handling characteristics of In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
the vehicle. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly Cargo tie-down rings
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
even load on all rings with rope
and death.
sufficient strength to hold down the
cargo.
i Always follow loading instructions
The trunk is the preferred place to carry (컄 page 239).
objects.
The enlarged cargo area should only be
used for items which do not fit in the
trunk alone.
240

Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf 1 Unlocking
below the rear window. 1 Glove box lid release 2 Locking
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy 2 Glove box
objects. Locking the glove box
Opening the glove box
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help 왘 Insert mechanical key (컄 page 337)
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 왘 Pull lid release 1. into the glove box lock and turn it to
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
The glove box lid opens downward. position 2.
an accident.
Closing the glove box Unlocking the glove box
왘 Turn mechanical key in the glove box
왘 Push lid up to close.
lock to position 1.
241

Controls in detail
Useful features
Armrest storage compartments Opening storage compartment Changing inclination of armrest

왘 Pull handle 1 and lift armrest.
Closing storage compartment

왘 Press armrest down until it engages
into place.
Opening telephone compartment

왘 Press button 3 on driver’s side or
button 2 on passenger side and lift
1 Handle armrest. 1 Handle
2 Button, passenger side
왘 Pull up on armrest.
3 Button, driver’s side Closing telephone compartment
! 왘 Press armrest down until it engages Lowering armrest
Do not store any items between the into place. 왘 Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.
telephone holder and the cover for the
blower. Otherwise these items could
be damaged when the holder is closed.
Use the space in the front door pocket
for stowing.
242

Controls in detail
Useful features
Armrest in the rear passenger Cup holders in front of seat armrest Sliding out the swiveling cup holder
compartment
Warning! G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
왘 Push button 1.
왘 Pull the top of the armrest out and fold
Underneath the swiveling cup holder is The cup holder slides upward.
it down.
another stationary cup holder. You can
!
only use this when the swiveling cup holder
is pulled out and completely turned No objects should be in the swiveling
outward. cup holder when the swiveling cup
holder is slided upward. Otherwise the
swiveling cup holder or the objects
could be damaged.
243

Controls in detail
Useful features
Turning the swiveling cup holder Turning the swiveling cup holder inward Cup holder in rear seat armrest
outward and sliding it in
Warning! G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
왘 Turn the cup holder in the direction of 왘 Turn the cup holder in the direction of
arrow 2 until it engages. arrow 3 until it engages.
You can now use both cup holders. 왘 Turn the cup holder in the direction of
arrow 4 until it engages.
!
No objects should be in the stationary
cup holder when the swiveling cup
holder is turned inward and pushed in.
Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or
the objects could be damaged.
1 Cup holder
244

Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening cup holder Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert

왘 Briefly press the front of cup holder 1.
The cup holder slides out slightly. Center console ashtray Warning! G
왘 Pull out the cup holder until it stops. Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to
Closing cup holder secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
왘 Slide cup holder 1 in until it engages. selector lever to position N (manual trans-
mission: second gear). With gear selector
Parcel net in front passenger footwell lever in position N (manual transmission:
second gear) turn off the engine.
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
왘 Secure vehicle from movement by
small and light items, such as road maps,
1 Cover plate setting the parking brake.
mail, etc.
2 Sliding button
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
3 Ashtray insert
Warning! G 왘 Briefly press the bottom of cover
position N (manual transmission:
second gear).
plate 1.
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob- Now you have more room to take out
jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net. The cover plate opens automatically. the ashtray insert.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- 왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right.
den maneuvers, they could be thrown
The ashtray insert 3 slides out
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
slightly.
to vehicle occupants.
왘 Remove the ashtray insert.
245

Controls in detail
Useful features
Reinstalling ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert Cigarette lighter

왘 Push the ashtray insert 3 down into 왘 Push button 1 to disengage ashtray
the retainer until it engages. insert 2 and remove it.
왘 Push down cover plate 1 to close
Reinstalling ashtray insert
ashtray.
왘 Push the ashtray insert 2 down into
The cover plate engages.
the retainer until it engages.
Rear seat ashtray 왘 Push at top of cover 3 to close
ashtray.
1 Cover plate
2 Cigarette lighter
왘 Briefly press the bottom of cover
plate 1.
The cover plate opens automatically.
1 Button 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2.
2 Ashtray insert The cigarette lighter will pop out
3 Cover automatically when hot.
왘 Pull at top of cover 3.
246

Controls in detail
Useful features
Electrical outlet in the rear passenger Telephone*

Warning! G compartment
Never touch the heating element or sides of Warning! G

the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only. Never operate radio transmitters equipped
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock out being connected to an external antenna)
your vehicle. Do not leave children unat- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
cle equipment may cause an accident sibly resulting in an accident and personal
and/or serious personal injury. injury.
1 Electrical outlet
2 Cover
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
i 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). phone or a citizens band unit, should only
The lighter socket can be used to be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
accommodate electrical accessories 왘 Pull at top of cover 2.
nected to an antenna that is installed on
up to a maximum 85 W. 왘 Flip cover 1 to the left and insert the outside of the vehicle.
electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
왘 Push down cover plate 1 to close The external antenna must be approved by
ashtray. i Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
The electrical outlet can be used to rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
The cover plate engages. tion on the installation of an approved
accommodate electrical consumers
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
maximum of 180 W. mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
247

Controls in detail
Useful features
You can take and place telephone calls Tele Aid*

Warning! G using the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- !
Please do not forget that your primary re- phone functions, use the control system The initial activation of the Tele Aid
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s (컄 page 150). system may only be performed by
attention to the road must always be
See separate operating manual for instruc- completing the subscriber agreement
his/her primary focus when driving. For
tions on how to use the telephone. and placing an acquaintance call using
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
the ¡ button. Failure to complete
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
either of these steps will result in a
and stop before placing or taking a tele- Warning! G system that is not activated.
phone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from If you have any questions regarding
driving, please use the hands-free device using a cellular telephone while driving a activation, please call the Response
and only use the telephone when road, vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some for safety reasons, the driver should not use or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. motion.
Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Man- Stop the vehicle in a safe location before
agement and Data System)1 if road, weather answering or placing a call.
and traffic conditions permit.
1 Observe all legal requirements.
248

Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the i
Roadside Assistance button • or The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
the Information button ¡, depend- network for communication and the
Demand)
ing on the type of response required. GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
The Tele Aid system consists of three
i lites for vehicle location. If either of
types of response:
these signals are unavailable, the
앫 automatic and manual emergency The SOS button is located above the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
interior rear view mirror.
앫 roadside assistance and this occurs, assistance must be sum-
The Roadside Assistance button • moned by other means.
앫 information and the Information button ¡ are
The Tele Aid system is operational provid- located below the center armrest System self-check
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, cover.
Initially, after switching on ignition, mal-
properly connected, not damaged and
functions are detected and indicated (the
cellular and GPS coverage is available. Shortly after the completion of your Tele
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can Roadside Assistance button • and the
user ID and password. By visiting
be adjusted when using the volume control Information button ¡ stay on longer
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
on the multifunction steering wheel. To than ten seconds or do not come on). The
(USA only), you will have access to account
raise, press button æ and to lower, message Tele Aid malfunction. Drive
information, remote door unlock and
press button ç. The volume can also be to workshop appears in the multifunction
more.
adjusted using the volume knob on your display.
audio system or COMAND* head unit.
249

Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls A voice connection between the Response

Warning! G An emergency call is initiated
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon af-
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in automatically following an accident in
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in which the emergency tensioning devices
The Response Center will attempt to
the Information button remain illuminated (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
determine more precisely the nature of the
constantly in red and/or the message An emergency call can also be initiated emergency provided they can speak to an
Tele Aid malfunction. Drive to manually by opening the cover next to the occupant of the vehicle.
workshop is displayed in the multifunction interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
display after the system self-check, a mal- The Tele Aid system is available if
briefly pressing the button located under
function in the system has been detected. the cover. See (컄 page 251) for 앫 it has been activated and is
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined instructions on initiating an emergency call operational. Activation requires a
above, the system may not operate as manually. subscription for monitoring services,
expected. Have the system checked at the Once the emergency call is in progress, the connection and cellular air time
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin 앫 the relevant cellular phone network
possible. to flash. The message Connecting call and GPS signals are available and pass
appears in the multifunction display and the information on to the Response
the audio system is muted. When the Center
connection is established, the message
Call connected appears in the multifunc- i
tion display. All information relevant to the Location of the vehicle on a map is only
emergency, such as the location of the possible if the vehicle is able to receive
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite signals from the GPS satellite network
location system), vehicle model, identifica- and pass the information on to the
tion number and color are generated. Response Center.
250

Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
flashing continuously and there was no vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
voice connection to the Response Center vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
established, then the Tele Aid system could do not wait for voice contact after you have
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele- pressed the emergency button. Carefully
vant cellular phone network is not available). leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
The message Call failed. appears in the tion. The Response Center will automatically
multifunction display for approximately ten contact local emergency officials with the
seconds. 1 Cover vehicle’s approximate location if they
Should this occur, assistance must be 2 SOS button receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
summoned by other means. make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
왘 Briefly press on cover 1. pants.
The cover will open.
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
251

Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance i

dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Located below the center armrest cover is
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to Assistance button • remains illumi-
the Roadside Assistance button •.
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized nated in red for approximately ten
왘 Press and hold button (for longer than Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such seconds during the system self-check
two seconds). as labor and/or towing, charges may after switching on ignition (together
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance with the SOS button and the Informa-
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. manual for more information. tion button ¡).
The button will flash while the call is in The following is only available in the USA: See system self-check (컄 page 249)
progress. The message Connecting
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such when the indicator lamp does not come
call will appear in the multifunction
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or on in red or stays on longer than
display and the audio system is muted.
the replacement of a flat tire with the approximately ten seconds.
When the connection is established, the vehicle spare tire are obtainable. If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
message Call connected appears in the
Assistance button • is flashing
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
continuously and there was no voice
will transmit data generating the vehicle
connection to the Response Center
identification number, model, color and
established, then the Tele Aid system
location (subject to availability of cellular
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
and GPS signals).
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
A voice connection between the Roadside phone network is not available). The
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants message Call failed. appears in the
of the vehicle will be established. multifunction display.
왘 Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
252

Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance calls can be When the connection is established, the i

terminated using the t button on message Call connected appears in the The indicator lamp on the Information
the multifunction steering wheel or the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system button ¡ remains illuminated in red
respective button for ending a will transmit data generating the vehicle for approximately ten seconds during
telephone call on the audio system or identification number, model, color and the system self-check after switching
COMAND* head unit. location (subject to availability of cellular on ignition (together with the SOS
and GPS signals). button and the Roadside Assistance
Information button ¡ A voice connection between the Customer button •).
Located below the center armrest cover is Assistance Center representative and the See system self-check (컄 page 249)
the Information button ¡. occupants of the vehicle will be when the indicator lamp does not come
established. Information regarding the on in red or stays on longer than
왘 Press and hold button (for longer than
operation of your vehicle, the nearest approximately ten seconds.
two seconds).
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
A call to the Customer Assistance USA products and services is available to If the indicator lamp on the Information
Center will be initiated. The button will you. button ¡ is flashing continuously
flash while the call is in progress. The and there was no voice connection to
For more details concerning the Tele Aid the Response Center established, then
message Connecting call will appear
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and the Tele Aid system could not initiate
in the multifunction display and the
use your ID and password (sent to you an Information call (e.g. the relevant
audio system is muted.
separately) to learn more (USA only). cellular phone network is not
available). The message Call failed.
253

Controls in detail
Useful features
Information calls can be terminated Upgrade scenario i

using the t button on the An emergency call is possible even if other The indicator lamp in the respective
multifunction steering wheel or the re- services are active. button flashes until the call is con-
spective button for ending a telephone cluded. Calls can only be terminated by
call on the audio system or COMAND* ! a Response Center or Customer
head unit. If the indicator lamp continues to flash Assistance Center representative
or the system does not reset, contact except Roadside Assistance and
! the Response Center at Information calls, which can also be
If the indicator lamps do not start flash- 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or terminated by pressing button t on
ing after pressing one of the buttons or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or the multifunction steering wheel or the
remain illuminated (in red) at any time, Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance respective button for ending a
the Tele Aid system has detected a at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes telephone call on the audio system or
malfunction or the service is not (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or COMAND* head unit.
currently active, and may not initiate a Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center in Canada.
and have the system checked or
contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
254

Controls in detail
Useful features
i Remote door unlock i

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, In case you have locked your vehicle unin- The remote door unlock feature is
the audio system or the COMAND* tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), available if the relevant cellular phone
system audio is muted and the and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: network is available.
selected mode (radio or CD) pauses. The SOS button will flash and the
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
The optional cellular phone (if installed) message Connecting call will appear
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
switches off. If you must use this in the multifunction display to indicate
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
phone, the vehicle must be parked. receipt of the door unlock command.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place You will be asked to provide your pass-
the call. The COMAND* navigation word which you provided when you Once the vehicle is unlocked, a
system (if engaged) will continue to completed the subscriber agreement. Response Center specialist will
run. The display in the instrument attempt to establish voice contact with
왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the
cluster is available for use, and spoken the vehicle occupants.
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
commands are only available by press- of 20 seconds until the SOS button is If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
ing the RPT button on the COMAND* flashing. for more than 20 seconds before door
unit. A pop-up window will appear in unlock authorization was received by
the COMAND* display to indicate that The message Connecting call
the Response Center, you must
a Tele Aid call is in progress. appears in the multifunction display.
wait 15 minutes before pulling the
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- trunk recessed handle again.
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
255

Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener*

In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The built-in remote control is capable of
왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
The police will issue a numbered devices, for example garage door openers,
incident report. gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
왘 Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along You can program the signal transmitter
with your password issued to you when buttons.
you subscribed to the service. Remote control integrated into the interior
rear view mirror
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s 1 Indicator lamp
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and 5 Hand-held transmitter button
you. The vehicle’s location will only be 6 Hand-held remote control
provided to law enforcement. transmitter (not part of the
vehicle equipment)
i
When the anti-theft alarm or the
tow-away alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call is initiated automat-
ically to the Response Center. See
anti-theft alarm system* (컄 page 83)
and tow-away alarm* (컄 page 85).
256

Controls in detail
Useful features
i i
Warning! G Certain types of garage door openers For operation in the USA only:
are incompatible with the integrated This device complies with Part 15 of
Before programming the integrated remote
opener. If you should experience the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
control to a garage door opener or gate
difficulties with programming the the following two conditions:
operator, make sure people and objects are
transmitter, contact an authorized (1) This device may not cause harmful
out of the way of the device to prevent po-
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call interference, and
tential harm or damage. When programming
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
Center (in the USA only) at (2) this device must accept any
down. When programming a gate operator,
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer interference received, including
the gate opens or closes.
Service (in Canada) at interference that may cause
Do not use the integrated remote control 1-800-387-0100. undesired operation.
with any garage door opener that lacks
Any unauthorized modification to this
safety stop and reverse features as required
device could void the user’s authority
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
to operate the equipment.
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse -
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
257

Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the Step 3: i

integrated remote control The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first
왘 Hold the end of the hand-held remote
Step 1: control transmitter 6 of the device time the signal transmitter button is
you wish to train approximately 2 to programmed. If this button has already
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface been programmed, the indicator lamp
Step 2: of the integrated remote control will only start flashing after
왘 If you have previously programmed an located on the interior rear view mirror, 20 seconds.
integrated signal transmitter button keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
and wish to retain its programming, Step 4: Step 5:
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press 왘 When the indicator lamp 1 flashes
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
and hold the two outer signal transmit- rapidly, release both buttons.
press the hand-held transmitter
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
button 5 and the desired integrated Step 6:
them only when the indicator lamp 1
signal transmitter button (2, 3
begins to flash after approximately 왘 Press and hold the just-trained
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
20 seconds (do not hold the button for integrated signal transmitter button
completing step 5.
longer than 30 seconds). This proce- and observe the indicator lamp 1.
dure erases any previous settings for The indicator lamp 1 on the
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
all three channels and initializes the integrated remote control will flash,
constantly, programming is complete
memory. If you later wish to program a first slowly and then rapidly.
and your device should activate when
second and/or third hand-held trans-
the integrated signal transmitter
mitter to the remaining two signal
button is pressed and released.
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
258

Controls in detail
Useful features
i Rolling code programming Step 9:

If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly To train a garage door opener (or other 왘 Press “training” button on the garage
for about two seconds and then turns rolling code devices) with the rolling code door opener motor head unit.
to a constant light, continue with feature, follow these instructions after
The “training light” is activated.
programming steps 8 through 12 as completing the “Programming” portion
your garage door opener may be (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second You have 30 seconds to initiate the
equipped with the “rolling code” person may make the following training following step.
feature. procedures quicker and easier.) Step 10:
Step 8: 왘 Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
Step 7:
왘 Locate “training” button on the garage release the programmed integrated
왘 To program the remaining two buttons, door opener motor head unit. signal transmitter button (2, 3
repeat the steps above starting with or 4).
step 3. Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand. Step 11:
Depending on manufacturer, the 왘 Press, hold for two seconds and
“training” button may also be referred release same button a second time to
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there complete the training process.
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener Some garage door openers (or other rolling
operator’s manual. code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training. 컄컄
259

Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄Step 12: Gate operator/Canadian programming Step 4:

왘 Confirm the garage door operation by Canadian radio-frequency laws require 왘 Continue to press and hold the
pressing the programmed integrated transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) integrated signal transmitter button
signal transmitter button (2, 3 after several seconds of transmission (2, 3 or 4) while you press and
or 4). which may not be long enough for the re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the remote control transmitter 6 every
Step 13:
signal during programming. Similar to this two seconds until the frequency signal
왘 To program the remaining two buttons, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators has been learned. Upon successful
repeat the steps above starting with are designed to “time-out” in the same training, the indicator lamp 1 will
step 3. manner. flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator 왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and
(regardless of where you live) by using the step 6 to complete.
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
260

Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control Erasing the integrated remote control Reprogramming a single integrated
memory signal transmitter button
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). To program a device using a signal trans-
왘 Select and press the appropriate
mitter button previously trained, follow
integrated signal transmitter button 왘 Simultaneously hold down the signal
these steps:
(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for
controlled device. approximately 20 seconds, until the 왘 Press and hold the desired signal
The integrated remote control trans- indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
mitter continues to send the signal as not hold for longer than 30 seconds. Do not release the button.
long as the button is pressed – up to The codes of all three channels are 왘 The indicator lamp will begin to flash
20 seconds. erased. after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the integrated signal transmitter
i button, proceed with programming
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes starting with step 3.
of all three channels.
261

262

Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
263

Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle !
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- Additional instructions for AMG
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later vehicles:
on.
앫 During the first 1000 miles
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first (1500 km), do not exceed a speed
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads speeds above 4500 rpm in each
(full throttle driving) and excessive gear.
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner. to your vehicle type, also apply when
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down. driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
after the engine or the rear differential has
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle been replaced
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever. i
앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when Always obey applicable speed limits.
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
264

Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,

depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G Warning! G
conditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times.
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgement. Power assistance
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
accident are greatly increased when you
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low drink or take drugs and drive. Warning! G
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or
power assistance for the brake and steering
eration. taking drugs.
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
앫 Have all maintenance work performed in mind that a considerably higher degree of
at the intervals specified in the effort is necessary to brake and steer the
Maintenance Booklet and as required vehicle.
by the maintenance service display.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly country.
265

Operation
Brakes To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly be the reason for low brake fluid in the
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the reservoir.
Warning! G vehicle with considerable force prior to
Have the brake system inspected
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
immediately. Contact an authorized
After driving in heavy rain for some time the brakes.
without applying the brakes or through wa-
If your brake system is normally only
ter deep enough to wet brake components, All checks and service work on the brake
subject to moderate loads, you should
the first braking action may be somewhat system should be carried out by qualified
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
reduced and increased pedal pressure may technicians only. Contact an authorized
brakes by applying above-normal braking
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- Mercedes-Benz Center.
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
enhance the grip of the brake pads. Only install brake pads and brake fluid
in front.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will !
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Warning! G
It can also result in the brakes overheating, Refer to the description of the Brake If other than recommended brake pads are
thereby significantly reducing their effec- Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 78). installed, or other than recommended brake
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- If the parking brake is released and the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
dent. brake warning lamp in the instrument safe braking is substantially impaired. This
cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the could result in an accident.
reservoir is too low.
266

Operation
! When starting off on a slippery surface, do

When driving down long and steep not allow a drive wheel to spin for an Warning! G
grades, relieve the load on the brakes extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the Do not park this vehicle in areas where
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
drivetrain which is not covered by the combustible materials such as grass, hay or
engine’s braking power. This helps
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. leaves can come into contact with the hot
prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear. ! ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Simultaneously depressing the To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
accelerator pedal and applying the sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
on for some time, rather than immediately
brake reduces engine performance and the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
parking, so that the air stream will cool
causes premature brake and drivetrain
down the brakes faster. 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
wear.
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Driving off
Parking 앫 Move the gear selector lever to
position P (manual transmission: first or
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
reverse gear).
driving off. Perform this procedure only !
when the road is clear of other traffic. 앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
Set the parking brake whenever park-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition, 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
move gear selector lever to position P wheels towards the road curb.
place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached. (manual transmission: first or reverse 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
gear). to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
When parking on hills, always turn front
wheels towards the road curb. 앫 Take the SmartKey with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
267

Operation
Tires The treadwear indicator appears as a solid

band across the tread. Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Although the applicable federal motor
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- driving with a flat tire or driving at high
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
you should turn on the hazard warning flash- heat build-up and possibly a fire.
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
tion to an area which is a safe distance from Hydroplaning
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
the road.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody the adhesion properties on a wet road are
Depending on the depth of the water layer
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires sharply reduced.
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
Depending upon the weather and/or road vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies road and apply brakes cautiously in the
repairs.
widely. rain.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Specified tire pressures must be main-
law. These indicators are located in six
tained. This applies particularly if the tires
places on the tread circumference and
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
become visible at a tread depth of
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
atures).
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
268

Operation
Tire traction considerably greater than when the road is Tire speed rating
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or propriate caution. Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
icy road is always lower than on a dry road. speed limits should be obeyed. Use
! prudent driving speeds appropriate to
You should pay particular attention to the
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This prevailing conditions.
condition of the road whenever the outside
may cause serious damage to the
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Warning! G
Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate

a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
mum speed rating of the tires.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such Exceeding the maximum speed for which
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
with extreme caution. failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
and for others.
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
269

Operation
C 230 Kompressor (Canada only), C 55 AMG Winter driving instructions

C 240, C 240 4MATIC,
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
C 320 (USA only), C 320 4MATIC The most important rule for slippery or icy
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
Your vehicle is factory equipped with of 186 mph (300 km/h).
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
An electronic speed limiter prevents your maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
vehicle from exceeding a speed of system under such conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your 155 mph (250 km/h).
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
i move gear selector lever to position N or in
130 mph (210 km/h).
case of manual transmission declutch.
For information on tire speed rating for
Try to keep the vehicle under control by
C 230 Kompressor Sport, C 320 Sport winter tires, see “Winter tires”
corrective steering action.
(컄 page 290).
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating i
of 168 mph (270 km/h). For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains”
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
(컄 page 291).
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
Warning! G
prevent this type of control loss.
270

Operation
Road salts and chemicals can adversely Standing water

affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
force may become necessary to produce !
the normal braking effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
Do not drive through flooded areas or
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
Depressing the brake pedal periodically water of unknown depth. Before driving
and from around the vehicle with the engine
when traveling at length on salt-strewn through water, determine its depth.
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking Never accelerate before driving into
ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-
efficiency back to normal. water. The bow wave could force water
sulting in unconsciousness and death.
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
If the vehicle is parked after being driven To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, ment, thus damaging them.
on salt-treated roads, the braking open a window slightly on the side of the
efficiency should be tested as soon as vehicle not facing the wind If you must drive through standing wa-
possible after driving is resumed. ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
Warning! G Warning! G these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
Make sure not to endanger any other road The outside temperature indicator is not
engine or transmission, or could result
users when carrying out these braking designed to serve as an ice-warning device
in water being ingested by the engine
maneuvers. and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
through the air intake causing severe
Indicated temperatures just above the
internal engine damage. Any such
freezing point do not guarantee that the
damage is not covered by the
road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”

(컄 page 290).
271

Operation
Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio Telephones* and two-way radios
transmitters
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
Always fasten items being carried as
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
securely as possible. Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
possibly resulting in an accident and
securely fastened in the vehicle. Management and Data System), radio or
personal injury.
telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
The trunk is the preferred place to carry conditions permit.
objects. Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should
Driving abroad only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
Abroad, there is an extensive on the outside of the vehicle.
1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas instructions regarding use of an external
which are not listed in the index of your antenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
272

Operation
Catalytic converter Emission control

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine serve to
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or keep the toxic components of the exhaust
important element in conjunction with the operate this vehicle in areas where combus- gases within permissible limits required by
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial tible materials such as grass, hay or leaves law.
control of the pollutants in the exhaust can come into contact with the hot exhaust
These systems, of course, will function
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
properly only when maintained strictly
operating condition by following our and cause a vehicle fire.
according to factory specifications. Any
recommended maintenance instructions
adjustments on the engine should,
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
! Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians. Engine adjustments should not be
To prevent damage to the catalytic
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
converters, only use premium unleaded
service jobs must be carried out regularly
gasoline in this vehicle.
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
Any noticeable irregularities in engine requirements. For details refer to the
operation should be repaired promptly. Maintenance Booklet.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
273

Operation
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant 앫 Driving when your engine is badly
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon temperature may rise close to overheated can cause some fluids,
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause approximately 248°F (120°C). which may have leaked into the engine
unconsciousness and lead to death. compartment, to catch fire. You could
The engine should not be operated with be seriously burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas engine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam com-
have the cause determined and corrected ing from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
274

Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling The fuel filler flap is located on the
Warning! G right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
Warning! G Flexible Fuel Vehicles only (identified by a the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks
label reading Premium gasoline or E85 the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. only! on fuel filler flap):
It burns violently and can cause serious Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha-
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited
extinguish all smoking materials. Never or if you come into contact with it or inhale
allow sparks, flame or smoking materials fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of Ethanol
near gasoline! fumes and skin contact with Ethanol. Extin-
guish all open flames before fueling. Never
smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol.
1 To open the fuel filler flap

2 To insert the fuel filler cap
3 Tire pressure table
왘 Turn the engine off by turning the
SmartKey to position 0.
switch. 컄컄
275

Operation
At the gas station
컄컄왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at i

the point indicated by arrow 1. Warning! G Only use premium unleaded gasoline
The fuel filler flap springs open. with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
왘 Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and pressure in the system which could cause a
Information on gasoline quality can
hold on to it until possible pressure is gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
normally be found on the fuel pump.
released. spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal More information on gasoline can be
왘 Take off cap and set it in direction of
injury. found in the Factory Approved Service
arrow 2 in the recess on the fuel filler
Products pamphlet.
flap.
왘 Replace fuel cap by turning it Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
clockwise. a label reading Premium gasoline or
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
You will hear when fuel cap is E85 only! on fuel filler flap.
unit.
tightened. For more information, see “Flexible
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
왘 Close fuel filler flap. Fuel Vehicles” (컄 page 392).
unit cuts out – do not top up or
overfill.
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ú malfunc-
tion indicator lamp (USA only) or
the ± malfunction indicator lamp
(Canada only) to illuminate.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 304) and (컄 page 305).
276

Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip Coolant Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
ble water quality). For more information, For more information on filling up the
see “Coolant level” (컄 page 283) and see washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 387). (컄 page 285).
Brake fluid Engine oil level
! For more information on engine oil level,

see “Engine oil” (컄 page 279).
If you find that the brake fluid in the
1 Coolant brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Vehicle lighting
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed) minimum mark or below, have the
3 Windshield washer and headlamp brake system checked for brake pad Check function and cleanliness. For more
cleaning system* thickness and leaks immediately. information on replacing light bulbs, see
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 344).
i Center immediately. Do not add brake Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 109).
Opening the hood, see (컄 page 278). fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see “Practical Tire inflation pressure
hints” (컄 page 303).
More information on tire inflation pressure
Removing fuse box cover (컄 page 370). (컄 page 287).
277

Operation
Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull lever 1 downwards. 왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of

radiator grille.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2
will extend out of the radiator grille. 왘 Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
Warning! G the handle) and then release it.
!
Do not pull the release lever while the The hood will be automatically held
To avoid damage to the windshield
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood open at shoulder height by gas-filled
wipers or hood, never open the hood if
could be forced open by passing air flow. struts.
the wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening Warning! G
The hood lock release lever is located to
the left of the steering wheel under the To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
dashboard. moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
2 Handle for opening the hood clear of fan blades.
1 Hood lock release lever
278

Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
앫 the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
call the fire department. approximately 1 ft (30 cm). higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
왘
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos- drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz will
tic socket) of the ignition system restrict your warranty entitlement.
앫 with the engine running More information on this subject is
앫 while starting the engine
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
279

Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the i

control system If you want to interrupt the checking
When checking the oil level procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
앫 the vehicle must be parked on level
wheel.
ground
앫 with the engine at operating tempera- 왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
ture, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least five minutes with For adding engine oil see (컄 page 281).
the engine turned off More information on engine oil can be
One of the following messages will found in the “Technical data” section
앫 with the engine not at operating tem- subsequently appear in the indicator: (컄 page 387) and (컄 page 390).
perature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes 앫 Engine oil level
with the engine turned off OK Other display messages
To check the engine oil level via the 앫 Add 1.0 qt engine oil If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
multifunction display, do the following: for max. oil level in the starter switch, the following
message will appear:
왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33). (Canada: 1.0 l)
Switch ignition on to
The standard display (컄 page 121) should 앫 Add 1.5 qts engine oil
check engine oil level
appear in the multifunction display. for max. oil level
왘 Press button k or j on the (Canada: 1.5 l)
steering wheel until the following 앫 Add 2.0 qts engine oil
message is seen in the multifunction for max. oil level
display:
(Canada: 2.0 l)
280

Operation
Engine compartment
If you see the message: If there is excess engine oil with the engine Adding engine oil
at operating temperature, the following
Observe waiting time !
message will appear:
왘 If engine is at operating temperature, Only use approved engine oils and oil
Engine oil level
wait five minutes before repeating filters required for vehicles with
Reduce oil level
check procedure. Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of
왘 If engine is not at operating tempera-
ture yet, wait 30 minutes before off. Contact an authorized approved engine oils and oil filters,
repeating check procedure. Mercedes-Benz Center. refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet in your vehicle
If you see the message: ! literature portfolio, or contact an
Engine oil level
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Not when engine on
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not Using engine oils and oil filters of
왘 Turn off the engine. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited specification other than those
Warranty. expressly required for the Maintenance
왘 If the engine is at operating tempera- System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
ture, wait five minutes before checking vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
oil. More information on messages in the
at change intervals longer than those
display concerning engine oil can be found
왘 If the engine is not at operating temper- called for by the Maintenance System
in the “Practical hints” section
ature yet, you must wait 30 minutes (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
(컄 page 320) and (컄 page 321).
before checking oil. Vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
281

Operation
Engine compartment
! Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
off. It could cause damage to the entering the ground or water.
engine and catalytic converter not !
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
Warranty.
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Warranty.
C 230 Kompressor (all models)
1 Filler cap 왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful (컄 page 387) and (컄 page 390).
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Transmission fluid level
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water. C 240 (all models), C 320 (all models), The transmission fluid level does not need
C 55 AMG to be checked. If you notice transmission
1 Filler cap fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. check the transmission.
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
282

Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approx-

앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess imately one half turn to the left to
The engine coolant is a mixture of water pressure. If opened immediately, scald- release any excess pressure.
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out 왘 Continue turning the cap to the left and
the coolant level, the vehicle must be under pressure. remove it.
parked on level ground and the engine
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
must be cool. The coolant level is correct if the level
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
The coolant expansion tank is located on glycol which may burn if it comes into 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the black
the passenger side of the engine compart- contact with hot engine parts. top part of the reservoir
ment. 앫 for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
Warning! G 왘 Add coolant as required.
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: 왘 Replace and tighten cap.
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the For more information on coolant, see
hood if there are any signs of steam or “Coolants” (컄 page 394).
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
1 Coolant expansion tank
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
2 Cap
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
283

Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
G Observe E
all safety instructions Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
automotive batteries.
C
engine compartment on the right hand Keep children away.
A
side (컄 page 360). Risk of explosion
F
The battery should always be sufficiently Follow the instructions in this
D from battery. Do not smoke.

charged in order to achieve its rated Keep flames or sparks away Operator's Manual.
service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
B Battery
for battery maintenance intervals. acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
short-distance trips, you will need to have
method of disposal. Many states require
the battery charge checked more In case it does, immediately
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
frequently. flush affected area with clear
for recycling.
When replacing the battery, always use water and seek medical help if
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. necessary.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle

for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
284

Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield

headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix Warning! G
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
The windshield washer reservoir is located container. Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
in the engine compartment. ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
Washer Concentrate and water (or and burn. You could be seriously burned.
commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures). For more information, see “Windshield
washer and headlamp cleaning system*”
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze (컄 page 396).
where temperatures may fall below the
freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
1 Washer fluid reservoir cap
!
Fluid for the windshield washer system and Only use washer fluid which is suitable
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied for plastic lenses. Improper washer
from the windshield washer reservoir. It fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
has a capacity of: the headlamps.
앫 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without
headlamp cleaning system*
앫 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with
285

Operation
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important guidelines

for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. See an authorized damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- cause tire pressure loss and damage to
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous the tire beads.
mounted: damage cannot always be recognized on 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore pressure and correct as required.
components can be damaged. not assure the operating safety of the
앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
vehicle when such tires are used.
앫 The correct operating clearance of the too far. Adhesion properties on wet
wheels and the tires are no longer See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center roads are sharply reduced at tread
guaranteed. for information on tested and depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
recommended rims and tires for summer
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
and winter operation.
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
286

Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire Direction of rotation Checking tire inflation pressure
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advan-
varying factors including but not limited to: tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- Warning! G
mance. To benefit, however, you must
앫 Driving style
make sure the tires rotate in the direction If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
앫 Tire pressure specified. 앫 Check the tires for punctures from
앫 Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the foreign objects.
intended direction of tire rotation. 앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
Warning! G the valves or from around the rim.
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after Correct the tire pressure only when tires
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at
! intervals of no more than 14 days.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry If the tires are warm you should only
place with as little exposure to light as correct the tire pressure if it is too low for
possible. Protect tires from contact current operating conditions.
with oil, grease and gasoline.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the
specified tire inflation pressures for warm
and cold tires as well as for various
operating conditions.
287

Operation
Tires and wheels
i Tire pressure changes by approx. 1.5 psi

The pressures listed for light loads are (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air tempera- Warning! G
minimum values offering high driving ture change. Keep this in mind when
checking tire pressure where the tempera- Follow recommended inflation pressures.
comfort.
ture is different from the outside tempera- Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
Increased inflation pressures listed for ture. can result in sudden deflation (blowout)
heavier loads may also be used for light because they are more likely to become
loads. These higher pressures produce Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the punctured or damaged by road debris,
favorable handling characteristics. The potholes, etc.
ride of the vehicle, however, will be driving speed and the tire load.
somewhat harder. Never exceed the Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
max. values or inflate tires below the wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
tion and inflation. Spare tires will age and
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap. and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
become worn over time even if never used,
from being overheated.
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indi-
cated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
288

Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires If applicable to your vehicle's tire configu-

ration, tires can be rotated according to Warning! G
the tire manufacturer's recommended in-
Warning! G tervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty Have the tightening torque checked after
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature changing a wheel. Wheels could become
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires portfolio. If none is available, tires should loose if not tightened with a torque of
are of the same dimension. be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces- Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. sary, according to the degree of tire wear. bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
rear), tire rotation is not possible. The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 287).
For information on wheel change, see the
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles Rotate tires before the characteristic tire “Practical hints” section (컄 page 329) and
with tires of the same dimension all wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder (컄 page 353).
around. If your vehicle is equipped with wear on front tires and tread center wear
tires of the same dimension all around, on rear tires).
tires can be rotated, observing a a Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
maintain the intended rotation (spinning) of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
direction of the tire (컄 page 287). Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
In some cases, such as when your vehicle pressure.
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
289

Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your Winter tires Always observe the speed rating of the
vehicle winterized at an authorized winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service Always use winter tires at temperatures maximum speed for which your tires are
includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry rated is below the speed rating of your
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires vehicle, you must place a notice to this
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
is the only way to achieve the maximum effect where it will be seen by the driver.
concentration.
effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC Such notices are available from your tire
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the in winter operation. dealer or from any authorized
water of the windshield and headlamp Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safe handling, make sure that all
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
mounted winter tires are of the same make
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
and have the same tread design. Warning! G
for below freezing temperatures
(컄 page 396). Warning! G If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops the difference in tire characteristics may
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
with decreasing ambient temperature. very well impair turning stability and that
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
A well charged battery helps to make overall driving stability may be reduced.
longer suitable for winter operation.
sure that the engine can be started, Adapt your driving style accordingly.
even at low ambient temperatures.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
앫 Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- tire at the nearest authorized
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a Mercedes-Benz Center.
minimum tread depth of approximately
1/ in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
6
winter season.
290

Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only) Snow chains 앫 Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
The engine is equipped with a block Snow chains should only be driven on authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
heater. snow-covered roads at speeds not to be glad to advise you on this subject.
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
The electrical cable may be installed at an 앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
as soon as possible when driving on roads
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. depending on location. Always check
without snow.
local and state laws before installing
i snow chains.
When driving with snow chains, you !
may wish to deactivate the ESP
Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive
(컄 page 79) before setting the vehicle
use snow chains on rear tires only.
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle‘s traction. Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes:
Please observe the following guidelines 앫 245/40 R17 91W
when using snow chains:
앫 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL
앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible
앫 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫 T 125/90 R16 98M
앫 Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufac- 앫 T 125/80 R17 99M
turer's mounting instructions. 앫 145/70- 17 92P
291

Operation
Maintenance
In the “Operation” section you will find Starting approximately one month before The type of maintenance service due is
detailed information on operating, your next maintenance service is due, one indicated in the multifunction display:
maintaining and caring for your vehicle. of the following messages will appear in
9 Minor service (A)
the multifunction display while you are
We strongly recommend that you have
driving or when you switch on the ignition ´ Major service (B)
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
(example service A):
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with i
the Maintenance Booklet at the times Service A in XX Days Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible
called for by the maintenance service Service A in XX Miles (Km) Service System) only (Canada
indicator display. A Service due now vehicles): The interval between
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in maintenance services depends on your
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet driving habits. A gentle driving style,
and maintenance service indicator at the moderate engine speeds and the
designated times/mileage will result in avoidance of short-distance trips will
vehicle damage not covered by the lengthen the interval between services.
The maintenance service indicator will
notify you when your next maintenance
service is due.
292

Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service Maintenance service term exceeded Calling up the maintenance service
indicator indicator
If you have exceeded the suggested
The maintenance service indicator is maintenance service term, you will see the 왘 Switch on ignition (컄 page 33).
automatically cleared following message in the multifunction
The standard display of the control
display:
앫 after ten seconds when you switch on system appears (컄 page 121).
the ignition or when reaching the main- Service A exceeded by XX Days
왘 Press button k or j on the
tenance service threshold while driving Service A exceeded by XX Miles (Km)
multifunction steering wheel until the
앫 after 30 seconds, once the suggested In addition, a signal sounds when the maintenance service indicator with the
maintenance service term has passed message appears. service symbol 9 or ´ and the
You can also clear it yourself. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will service deadline appears in the
reset the maintenance service indicator multifunction display.
following a completed maintenance i
service.
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the maintenance
service indicator. To arrive at the true
maintenance service deadline, you will
need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service
indicator.
1 Reset button
Do not confuse the maintenance
왘 Press reset button 1 on the service indicator with the engine oil
instrument cluster. level indicator :.
293

Operation
Maintenance
Resetting the maintenance service i

indicator If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an
In the event that the maintenance service
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
correct it.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator Only reset if the proper maintenance
reset. The automotive maintenance facility service has been performed. Resetting
carrying out the maintenance service will the system without performing the
find the information for resetting the proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator in the maintenance service indicator will
maintenance-relevant information for your result in engine damage and/or other
vehicle. Such information is available from vehicle damage not covered by the
either your authorized Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
294

Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle Such damage is caused not only by More frequent washings are necessary to
extreme and varying climatic conditions, deal with unfavorable conditions:
but also by:
앫 near the ocean
Warning! G 앫 Air pollution
앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. 앫 Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Tar 앫 during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not immediately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
designed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Grease and oil
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external 앫 Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
influences which, if gone unchecked, can followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
앫 Brake fluid
attack the paintwork as well as the under- aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
body and cause lasting damage. 앫 Bird droppings Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
앫 Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
앫 Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
295

Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power washer Tar stains

compiled recommendations which are
When using a power washer for cleaning Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
specially matched to our vehicles and
the vehicle, always observe the manu- and become more difficult to remove. A tar
which always reflect the latest technology.
facturer’s operating instructions. remover is recommended.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized ! Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz Center. Never use a round nozzle to
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or power-wash tires. The intense jet of
should be applied when water drops on the
damage due to negligent or incorrect care water can result in damage to the tire.
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
cannot always be removed or repaired with Always replace a damaged tire. every three to five months, depending on
the car-care products recommended here.
Always keep the jet of water moving climate and washing detergent used.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. across the surface. Do not aim directly Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
at electrical parts, electrical connec- should be applied if the paint surface
The following topics deal with the cleaning tors, seals, or other rubber parts. shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
and care of your vehicle and give important gloss).
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care Do not apply any of these products or wax
products. if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide”. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones,
vehicle doors, etc.).
296

Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Vehicle washing Ornamental moldings

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
make sure to protect electrical compo- in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash chrome-plated parts, use a chrome
nents and connectors from the intrusion of detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz cleaner.
water and cleaning agents. approved Car Shampoo.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor- Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
turn signal lenses
rosion Wax, should be applied to the fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
engine compartment after every engine spray towards the ventilation intake. Use Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
cleaning. Before applying, all control plenty of water and rinse the sponge and Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
linkage bushings and joints should be chamois frequently. with plenty of water.
lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry To prevent scratches, never apply strong
should be protected from any wax. with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
agents to dry on the finish. cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not
attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
cloth or sponge.
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
297

Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades Window cleaning Light alloy wheels

왘 Fold wiper arms forward. 왘 Fold wiper arms forward. Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
Warning! G Warning! G light alloy wheels.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and For safety reasons, switch off wipers and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
remove SmartKey from starter switch remove SmartKey from starter switch using a soft bristle brush and a strong
before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise before cleaning the windshield, otherwise spray of water.
the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and
Follow the instructions on container.
cause injury. cause injury.
i
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a 왘 Use a window cleaning solution on all Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
clean cloth and detergent solution. glass surfaces. Acid may cause corrosion or damage
An automotive glass cleaner is the clear coat.
!
recommended.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back Instrument cluster
onto the windshield before turning the !
SmartKey in the starter switch. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
Fold the windshield wiper arms back mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
Hold on to the wiper when folding the onto the windshield before turning the washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
wiper arm back. If released, the force SmartKey in the starter switch. ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
of the impact from the tensioning scouring agents.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
spring could crack the windshield.
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
298

Operation
Vehicle care
Steering wheel and gear selector lever Headliner and rear window shelf Upholstery
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive clothing that have the tendency to give off
Leather Care. dirt. coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
Cup holders Seat belts colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or The webbing must not be treated with
will be prevented.
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
Leather upholstery
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use webbing at temperatures above 176°F
scouring agents. (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Hard plastic trim items
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may perforated leather as its underside should
with light pressure. severely weaken them. In a crash they may not become wet.
not be able to provide adequate protection.
299

Operation
Vehicle care
Cloth upholstery
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts

Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
300

Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
301

Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: switching on ignition, have it checked and
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to replaced if necessary.
come on during the bulb self-check when
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS malfunction The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
indicator lamp comes on while switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also Wheels may lock during hard braking,
driving. switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally 왘 Read and observe messages in the
but without the ABS available. display (컄 page 309).
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
other systems such as the navigation rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
system* or the automatic transmission* may as possible.
also be malfunctioning. Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below ten 왘 Switch off electrical consumers that
volts. The ABS has switched off. are currently not needed, e.g. seat
The battery might not be charged sufficiently. heating*.
왘 If necessary, have the generator
(alternator) and battery checked.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
302

Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the 왘 Release the parking brake
comes on while driving and parking brake set. (컄 page 48).
3 (Canada only)
you hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
comes on while driving. in the reservoir. vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
!
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
303

Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
indicator lamp comes on while possible by an authorized
± (Canada only) 앫 The fuel management
driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
system
An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The ignition system used by the service station to link the
앫 The emission control vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
system tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
tion of system malfunctions through
앫 Systems which affect the readout of diagnostic trouble
emissions codes. It is located in the front left
Such malfunctions may result area of the footwell next to the
in excessive emissions values parking brake pedal.
and may switch the engine to
its limp-home (emergency
operation) mode.
304

Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction A loss of pressure has been 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 275).
indicator lamp comes on while detected in the fuel system.
± (Canada only) If it is not closed properly:
driving. The fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system 왘 Close the fuel cap.
may be leaky. If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling start, turn off and
restart the engine three or four times
in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
305

Practical hints
What to do if …

v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP is deactivated. 왘 Switch the ESP back on (컄 page 79).
comes on while driving.
Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be switched back on,
Adapt your speed and driving to the have the system checked at an autho-
prevailing road, weather and traffic rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
conditions. possible.
The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into 왘 When driving off, apply as little
flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss throttle as possible.
in at least one tire. 왘 While driving, ease up on the
accelerator.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather
conditions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄 page 79).
Failure to follow these instructions
306

Practical hints
What to do if …

The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp in the The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
fuel gauge comes on while driving. mark. (컄 page 275).
< The red seat belt telltale illuminates The telltale reminds you to fasten seat 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
for a brief period after starting the belts.
The telltale goes out.
engine.
1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes on There is a malfunction in the restraint 왘 Drive with added caution to the
while driving. systems. The air bags or emergency ten- nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
sioning device (ETDs) could deploy unex- Center.
pectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
307

Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

56 The front passenger front A BabySmart TM1
child seat is installed
air bag off indicator lamp on the front passenger seat. Therefore
comes on. the passenger front air bag is switched
off.
The system is malfunctioning when 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
there is no BabySmartTM child seat possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
installed on the front passenger seat. Center.
The front passenger front The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure there is nothing between seat
air bag off indicator lamp cushion and child seat and check
does not come on with a installation of the child seat.
BabySmartTM child seat
왘 If the front passenger front air bag off
properly installed on the
indicator lamp remains out, have the
front passenger seat.
system checked as soon as possible by an
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
308

Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the Other messages of high priority and

multifunction display messages of less immediate priority can Warning! G
be cleared from the multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages using the reset button (컄 page 117). They No messages will be displayed if either the
appear in the multifunction display located are then stored in the vehicle status mes- instrument cluster or the multifunction
in the instrument cluster. sage memory (컄 page 130). Remember display is inoperative.
Certain warning and malfunction messag- that clearing a message will only make the Contact your nearest authorized
es are accompanied by an audible signal. message disappear. Clearing a message Mercedes-Benz Center.
will not correct the condition that caused
Address these messages accordingly and the message to appear.
follow the additional instructions given in i
this Operator’s Manual. Switching on ignition, causes all lamps
Warning! G as well as the multifunction display to
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system come on. Make sure that they are all in
All categories of messages contain
(컄 page 130) displays both cleared and working order before starting your jour-
important information which should be
uncleared messages. ney.
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
High-priority messages appear in the indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
On the pages that follow, you will find a
multifunction display in red color. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
compilation of the most important warning
Certain messages of high priority cannot Failure to repair condition noted may cause and malfunction messages that may
be cleared from the multifunction display damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz appear in the multifunction display. High
using the reset button (컄 page 117). Limited Warranty, or result in property priority messages appear in red color.
damage or personal injury.
309

Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message Possible cause Possible solution

ABS malfunction. The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. has switched off. The ESP and the BAS Wheels may lock during hard braking,
are also deactivated. reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning 왘 Have the system checked at an
normally but without the ABS available. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Display malfunction. The ABS or the ABS display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. malfunctioning. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘 Have the system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
310

Practical hints
What to do if …

BAS unavailable The charging voltage has fallen below ten 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual volts. The BAS has switched off.
왘 If necessary, have the generator and
The battery might not be charged battery checked.
sufficiently. When the voltage is above this value
The brake system is still functioning again, the BAS is operational again.
normally but without the BAS available.
malfunction. The BAS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. switched off. 왘 Have the system checked at an
soon as possible.
Display malfunction. The BAS or the BAS display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. malfunctioning.
왘 Have the system checked at an
soon as possible.
311

Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP unavailable The ESP was deactivated because of a 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual malfunction or interrupted power supply.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The ABS might not be operational. Center as soon as possible.
The brake system is still functioning Failure to follow these instructions
normally but without the ESP available. increases the risk of an accident.
If the yellow ESP warning lamp v As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
flashes while driving and this message electronic traction system switches on
appears, the electronic traction system again.
has switched off to prevent overheating
of the drive wheel brakes.
The self-diagnosis has not been The display will clear after driving a short
completed yet. distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The brake system is still functioning
normally but without the ESP available.
The charging voltage has fallen below ten 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
volts. The ESP has switched off.
왘 If necessary, have the generator and
The battery might not be charged battery checked.
sufficiently. When the voltage is above this value
again, the ESP is operational again.
312

Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP malfunction. The ESP is deactivated because of a 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. malfunction.
The brake system is still functioning Center as soon as possible.
normally but without the ESP available. Failure to follow these instructions
Display malfunction. The ESP or the ESP display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
SRS Restraint system The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
malfunction est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drive to workshop
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have

the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- not be activated when needed in an
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be accident, which could result in serious or
operational. For your safety, we strongly fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
recommend that you visit an authorized and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
313

Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution

# Battery Alternator The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately and check the
Visit workshop. Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
앫 broken poly-V-belt If it is broken:
앫 alternator malfunctioning 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine. Notify
If it is intact:
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest
Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 46).
Charge battery
Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical
Switch off consumers consumers.
314

Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) Parking brake You are driving with the parking brake 왘 Release the parking brake
Release brake. set. (컄 page 48).
! (Canada only)
2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon
Visit workshop. limit. as possible.
3 Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
Visit workshop. reservoir. notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
! !
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the checked by a qualified technician at the
Driving with this message displayed can
minimum mark or below, have the intervals specified in the Maintenance
result in an accident. Have your brake
brake system checked for brake pad booklet.
system checked immediately. Do not add
thickness and leaks.
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
315

Practical hints
What to do if …

B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 283).
Check level
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
!
Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major
engine damage.
316

Practical hints
What to do if …

• Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle and turn off the
Stop, engine off! engine.
왘 Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could
otherwise damage the engine.
During severe operating conditions and !

Warning! G stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- The engine should not be operated with
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). the coolant temperature above 248°F
Driving when your engine is badly over-
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
heated can cause some fluids which may
engine damage which is not covered by
have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
317

Practical hints
What to do if …

• Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop immediately and check the
Stop, engine off! poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage to
the engine. Notify an authorized
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with
this message displayed. Doing so could
result in serious engine damage that is not
Warranty.
왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 24).
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
Visit workshop. malfunctioning. the instrument cluster (컄 page 24).
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
318

Practical hints
What to do if …

Ñ Cruise contr. Cruise control is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop Center.
G Display malfunction. The instrument cluster display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. malfunctioning.
The displays for several systems have 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
malfunctioned. Some systems them- by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
selves may also have malfunctioned. Center.
± Display malfunction. Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
Visit workshop. relay information to the control system. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The following systems may have failed: Center.
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
J Doors open You are attempting to drive with one or 왘 Close the doors.
more doors open.
319

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Suggested solution

: USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 281) and check
At next gas station the engine oil level (컄 page 280).
add 1.0 qt engine oil
Canada only:
At next gas station
add 1.0 l engine oil
Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. There is a 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
Stop, engine off! danger of engine damage. soon as possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 281) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 280).
Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off.
Reduce oil level There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with
the catalytic converter. respect to its disposal.
Change engine oil It may be that there is water in the engine 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
Visit workshop. oil.
320

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Suggested solution

: Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped to a critical 왘 Check the engine oil level
Visit workshop. level. (컄 page 280) and add oil as required
(컄 page 281).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
Oil sensor malfunction The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
Visit workshop. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
When the message At next gas station When this occurs, the warning will first !
add 1.0 qt engine oil (Canada: 1.0 l) come on intermittently and then stay on if The engine oil level warnings should
appears while the engine is running and at the oil level drops further. not be ignored. Extended driving with
operating temperature, the engine oil level the symbol displayed could result in
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
has dropped to approximately the mini- serious engine damage that is not
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
mum level. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
service station where the engine oil should
be topped to the required level with an Warranty.
approved oil specified in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet.
321

Practical hints
What to do if …

4 Check gas cap. A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 275).
See Operator’s Manual the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky. 왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Y Hood open You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 278).
I Remove key. You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
SmartKey. switch.
Replace key No additional code available for 왘 Change the SmartKey.
Drive to workshop SmartKey.
322

Practical hints
What to do if …

. 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning. This message will only Center as soon as possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Backup lamp, left The left backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Backup lamp, right The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Brake lamp Brake lamp illumination is delayed or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop lamp is permanently on. Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Brake lamp right The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Display malfunction. The display for the lamps or the system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop. malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp left The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Front foglamp right The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Front left The left front side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
side marker lamp malfunctioning.
Front right The right front side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
sider marker lamp malfunctioning.
323

Practical hints
What to do if …

. High beam left The left high beam lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.
High beam right The right high beam lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.
License plate lamp, The left license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left malfunctioning.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right malfunctioning.
Light sensor The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. 왘 In the control system, set lamp
Drive to workshop The headlamps switch on automatically. operation to manual (컄 page 142).
왘 Switch on the headlamps using the
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 109).
Low beam left The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
324

Practical hints
What to do if …

. Low beam right The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
malfunctioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Parking lamp The left front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left front malfunctioning.
Parking lamp The right front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right front malfunctioning.
Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute bulb on A substitute bulb is being used.
Switch off lights. Headlamps have been turned on with the 왘 Switch off the headlamps.
driver’s door opened and the SmartKey
Taillamp left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Taillamp right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
325

Practical hints
What to do if …

. Turn signal The left front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left front malfunctioning.
Turn signal The right front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right front malfunctioning.
Turn signal The left turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
left mirror malfunctioning. This message will only Center as soon as possible.
stopped working.
Turn signal The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
right mirror malfunctioning. This message will only Center as soon as possible.
stopped working.
Turn signal The left rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left rear malfunctioning.
Turn signal The right rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right rear malfunctioning.
326

Practical hints
What to do if …

< Belt system The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop Center as soon as possible.
_ Steering oil The steering gear oil level is too low. 왘 Have the system checked by an
Visit workshop. There is a danger of steering gear authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
damage.
Warning! G
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
327

Practical hints
What to do if …

K Close slid./pop-up You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 227).
switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.
J Close slid./pop-up You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 227).
switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.
L Tele Aid malfunction. One or more main functions of the Tele 왘 Have the Tele Aid system* checked by
Drive to workshop Aid system* are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
t Function unavailable. This display appears if button t
or s on the multifunction steering
wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not
equipped with a telephone*.
Ê Trunk open This message will appear whenever the 왘 Close the trunk lid.
trunk lid is open.
W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 285).
please refill about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.
328

Practical hints
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit Removing the vehicle tool kit (except
C 55 AMG)
The first aid kit is located in the trunk on The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage
왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
the left side secured by a hook and loop compartment underneath the trunk floor.
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
fastener.
The following is included: trunk.
앫 Towing eye bolt
앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Vehicle jack
앫 Spare wheel bolts
앫 Spare fuses
앫 Valve extractor (C 55 AMG only)
1 First aid kit
앫 Protective wrap (C 55 AMG only) 1 Retaining screw
2 Hook and loop fastener
2 Storage well casing
앫 Collapsible wheel chock
왘 Unfasten hook and loop fastener 2.
왘 Loosen retaining screw 1 by turning it
앫 A pair of gloves
왘 Remove first aid kit 1. counterclockwise.
i 왘 Remove storage well casing 2. 컄컄
Check expiration dates and contents

for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
329

Practical hints
컄컄 i Removing the vehicle tool kit

Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage (C 55 AMG only)
well casing 5 must point in the direc- 왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
tion of travel. Otherwise you cannot trunk floor handle in upper edge of
place the storage well casing 2 on top trunk.
and secure the Minispare wheel with
retaining screw 1.
!
3 Arrow To prevent damage, always disengage
4 Minispare wheel trunk floor handle from upper edge of
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing trunk and lower trunk floor before
6 Vehicle tool kit closing the trunk lid.
왘 Remove vehicle tool kit 6.

1 Collapsible tire
Storing the vehicle tool kit 2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire)
왘 Place vehicle tool kit 6 in vehicle tool 3 Retaining screw
kit storage well casing 5. 왘 Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it
counterclockwise.
왘 Place storage well casing 2 over the
vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5 왘 Remove collapsible tire 1.
and turn retaining screw 1 clockwise
왘 Remove vehicle tool kit 2.
as far it will go to secure the Minispare
wheel.
330

Practical hints
Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage

compartment underneath the trunk floor.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
1 Vehicle jack
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
2 Collapsible wheel chock and spare
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
wheel bolts Storage position
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
3 Towing eye bolt 왘 Remove vehicle jack from its
before raising vehicle with jack.
4 Alignment bolt compartment.
5 Wheel wrench Do not disengage parking brake while the
6 Spare fuses and valve extractor vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is 왘 Push crank handle up.
7 Electric air pump always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
331

Practical hints
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1.

The collapsible wheel chock serves to 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
changing the wheel.
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
Operational position
왘 Turn crank handle clockwise until it
engages (operational position).
Before storing the vehicle jack in its
compartment:
앫 It should be fully collapsed.
앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
332

Practical hints
Minispare wheel (except C 55 AMG) Storing the Minispare wheel

왘 Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel
The Minispare wheel is located in the
well.
storage compartment underneath the
trunk floor. 왘 Place vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.
Removing the Minispare wheel Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit
왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage storage well casing 4 points in the
trunk floor handle in upper edge of direction of travel.
trunk. 왘 Place storage well casing (컄 page 329)
1 Vehicle tool kit
왘 Loosen the retaining screw 2 Arrow over vehicle tool kit storage well
(컄 page 329) in the middle of storage 3 Minispare wheel casing 4 and turn the retaining screw
well casing. 4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing (컄 page 329) clockwise as far it will go
to secure the Minispare wheel.
왘 Remove the storage well casing 왘 Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
(컄 page 329). casing 4. i
왘 Remove Minispare wheel 3. Arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage
well casing 4 must point in the
direction of travel. Otherwise you
cannot place the storage well casing
(컄 page 329) on top and secure the
Minispare wheel with the retaining
screw (컄 page 329).
333

Practical hints
! In the case of a flat tire, you may Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only)
To prevent damage, always disengage temporarily use the Minispare wheel when
trunk floor handle from upper edge of observing the following restrictions: The collapsible tire is located in the
trunk and lower trunk floor before storage compartment underneath the
앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
closing the trunk lid. trunk floor.
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility Removing the collapsible tire
Warning! G to have the flat tire repaired or
replaced as appropriate.
왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than trunk.
different from those of the road wheels. As one Minispare wheel mounted.
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
For more information, see “Rims and Tires”
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
(컄 page 380).
mounted.
The Minispare wheel should only be used
temporarily, and should be replaced with a
regular road wheel as quickly as possible.
1 Collapsible tire
2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire)
3 Retaining screw
334

Practical hints
왘 Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it 왘 Unscrew the valve insert from the valve !
counterclockwise. and allow the air to escape. To prevent damage, always disengage
왘 Remove collapsible tire 1. trunk floor handle from upper edge of
i
trunk and lower trunk floor before
It may take a few minutes for the col- closing the trunk lid.
Storing the collapsible tire
lapsible tire to deflate completely.
If you wish to store the collapsible tire after
use, carry out the following steps.
Otherwise the collapsible tire will not fit
왘 Screw the valve insert back into the Warning! G
valve.
the storage compartment. The dimensions of the collapsible tire are
왘 Screw the valve cap back on the valve.
! different from those of the road wheels. As
왘 Pull the protective wrap provided with a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
Make sure the collapsible tire is dry the vehicle tool kit over the collapsible change when driving with a collapsible tire
when storing it. tire. mounted.
왘 Store the collapsible tire and the valve The collapsible tire should only be used tem-
왘 Unscrew the valve cap from the valve
extractor in the storage compartment porarily, and should be replaced with a reg-
of the collapsible tire.
underneath the trunk floor. ular road wheel as quickly as possible.
왘 Take the valve extractor from the
왘 Pierce the protective wrap with
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 331).
retaining screw 3.
왘 Secure the collapsible tire by turning
retaining screw 3 clockwise.
335

Practical hints
In the case of a flat tire, you may Spare wheel bolts !

temporarily use the collapsible tire when Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
observing the following restrictions: mounting the Minispare wheel,
앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of collapsible tire, or other steel rims. The
50 mph (80 km/h). use of any wheel bolts other than wheel
bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel,
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
collapsible tire, or other steel rims will
to have the flat tire repaired or
physically damage the vehicle’s
replaced as appropriate.
brakes.
앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than
one collapsible tire mounted.
For more information, see “Rims and Tires” 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Warning! G
(컄 page 380). 2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel,
collapsible tire, or other steel rims Make sure to use the original length wheel
(located in trunk with spare wheel) bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
336

Practical hints
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with

the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.
i
Unlocking the driver’s door and/or the
trunk with the mechanical key will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following: 1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey. 왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of driver’s door lock until it stops.
arrow. 왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch. 왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the wise to position 1.
housing.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
337

Practical hints
Unlocking and opening the trunk 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the Locking the vehicle
trunk lid lock until it stops.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. 왘 Turn the mechanical key
the SmartKey, do the following:
counterclockwise to position 1.
The trunk lid lock is located next to the
왘 Close the passenger doors and the
handle above the rear license plate recess. The trunk lid unlocks.
trunk lid.
왘 Pull on handle 2.
왘 Press the central locking switch in the
The trunk lid opens. center console (컄 page 96).
! 왘 Check to see whether the locking
The trunk lid swings open upwards knobs on the passenger doors have
automatically. Always make sure there moved down.
is sufficient overhead clearance. 왘 If necessary push them down manually.
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
왘 Turn the mechanical key back and should now be locked.
1 Unlocking in an emergency remove it from the trunk lid lock.
2 Handle
338

Practical hints
Fuel filler flap
In case the central locking system does

not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
Warning! G
If you operate the emergency release but-
ton, be careful of the sharp edges so that
1 Locking you do not injure yourself. 1 Side trim
2 Release button
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
driver’s door lock until it stops. The release button is on the right-hand 왘 Open the trunk lid.
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to side of the luggage compartment behind 왘 Remove the side trim 1 from the
position 1. the side trim. right-hand side of the luggage compart-
The driver’s door is locked. ment.
왘 Turn release button 2 clockwise as far
as will go.
The fuel filler flap is released.
왘 Open the fuel filler flap from outside.
339

Practical hints
Manually unlocking the transmission 왘 Insert a tool 1 (e.g. flat blade

gear selector lever screwdriver) into the opening.
왘 Perform the following two steps
In the case of power failure the transmis-
simultaneously:
sion gear selector lever can be manually
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. 왘 Press tool 1 forward in the
direction of the arrow.
왘 Slide out the swiveling cup holder
(컄 page 243). 왘 Move gear selector lever from
position P.
왘 Remove tool 1 from the opening.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
1 Tool
340

Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
You can open or close the tilt/sliding

sunroof manually should an electrical
malfunction occur.
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
behind the lens 1 of the interior overhead
light.
왘 Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction 왘 Turn crank 3 clockwise to:

of the arrows. 앫 slide sunroof closed
왘 Lower the rear of the cover and
앫 raise sunroof at the rear
remove.
왘 Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
왘 Remove the cover.
앫 slide sunroof open
왘 Take the crank 3 out of the Operator’s
Manual pouch. 앫 lower sunroof at the rear
왘 Remove SmartKey from the starter
switch. i i
Do not disconnect electrical Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.
왘 Pry of lens 1 using a flat blade
connectors. The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
screwdriver.
synchronized after being operated
왘 Insert crank 3 through hole on the left manually (컄 page 230).
side.
341

Practical hints
If the batteries in the SmartKey are Batteries contain materials that can harm i
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be the environment if disposed of improperly. When inserting the batteries, make
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to Recycling of batteries is the preferred sure they are clean and free of lint.
have the batteries replaced at an method of disposal. Many states require
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling. i
When replacing batteries, always
Warning! G replace both batteries.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children. The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
Center.
immediately.
342

Practical hints
SmartKey 왘 Insert mechanical key 1 in side 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
opening and push grey slide. batteries 3 under contact spring 4
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type with the plus (+) side facing up.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘 Return battery compartment 2 into
왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
왘 Remove the mechanical key housing until it locks into place.
housing in direction of arrow.
(컄 page 337).
왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
왘 Remove the batteries.
SmartKey.
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment 3 Battery
4 Contact spring
343

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper i Bulbs

exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp fogged up on the inside as a result of
assemblies are in good working order at all high humidity, driving the vehicle a
times. distance with the lights on should clear
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely up the fogging.
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a i
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Substitute bulbs will be brought into
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
use when lamps malfunction. Observe
adjustment.
the messages in the multifunction
display (컄 page 323)
344

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Lamp Type Rear lamps
Lamp Type 4 Halogen headlamp: Lamp Type

High beam/high beam
1 Additional turn signal LED 7 High mounted brake LED
flasher H7 (55 W)
lamp lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
2 Halogen headlamp: High beam flasher H7 (55 W) 8 Brake lamp P 21 W
Turn signal lamp 1156 A Parking and standing W5W 9 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
Bi-Xenon* headlamp: lamp
Turn signal lamp 2357 A a Parking and side P 21/5 W
5 Front fog lamp HB4/9006 marker lamp
3 Halogen headlamp:
(55 W) b Backup lamp P 21 W
Low beam H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon* headlamp: 6 Side marker lamp W5W c License plate lamps C5W
Low and high beam1 D2S-35 W d Rear fog lamp (driver’s P 21/4 W
1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam side only), tail and
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do standing lamp
not replace the Xenon bulbs yourself. See an
345

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Warning! G 앫 Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
앫 Additional turn signals in the exterior
Allow the lamp to cool down before 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
changing a bulb. rear view mirrors
to prevent short circuits.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 High mounted brake lamp
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs. 앫 Xenon* lamps
A bulb can explode if you 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 Front fog lamps
앫 touch or move it when hot and grease.
i
앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not
Have the headlamp adjustment
앫 scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized
checked regularly.
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
346

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Low beam bulb

왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 1
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
and remove it.
front lamp, do the following first:
왘 Pull the electrical connector off.
position M (컄 page 109). 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise
and take out the bulb.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 278) (except
for side marker lamps). 왘 Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of the lamp
Halogen headlamp 3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb housing.
4 Bulb socket for low beam bulb 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it
5 Bulb socket for high beam bulb engages.
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
왘 Plug the electrical connector onto the
lamp bulb
bulb.
왘 Align housing cover 1 and press until
it engages.
1 Housing cover for low beam headlamp

2 Housing cover for high beam head-
lamp, parking and standing lamp
347

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam bulb Front turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 2 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb 왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 2
and remove it. counterclockwise and remove it. and remove it.
왘 Pull the electrical connector off. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn it 왘 Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 counterclockwise counterclockwise out of bulb 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6.
and take out the bulb. socket 3.
왘 Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6.
왘 Press new bulb gently into bulb
왘 Insert the new bulb so that its socket
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it 왘 Press bulb socket 6 back into the
locates in the recess of the lamp
engages. lamp.
housing.
왘 Place bulb socket 3 back into the 왘 Align housing cover 2 and press until
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it
lamp and turn it clockwise. it engages.
engages.
왘 Plug the electrical connector onto the
bulb.
it engages.
348

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bi-Xenon* headlamp High beam flasher bulb

왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 2
Warning! G and remove it.
왘 Pull the electrical connector off.
Do not remove the cover 1 for the
Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise
in Bi-Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace and take out the bulb.
the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo- 왘 Insert the new bulb so that its socket
nents. We recommend that you have such locates in the recess of the lamp
work done by a qualified technician. housing.
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing engages.
lamp bulb 왘 Plug the electrical connector onto the
bulb.
it engages.
1 Housing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamp

2 Housing cover for high beam flasher,
parking and standing lamp
349

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb Side marker lamp
왘 Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb 왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 2
counterclockwise and remove it. and remove it.
왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn it 왘 Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.
counterclockwise out of bulb 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5.
socket 3.
왘 Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.
왘 Press new bulb gently into bulb
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it 왘 Press bulb socket 5 back into the
engages. lamp.
왘 Place bulb socket 3 back into the 왘 Align housing cover 2 and press until
왘 Carefully slide the lamp towards the
lamp and turn it clockwise. it engages.
rear in direction of arrows.
왘 Remove the front end first.
왘 Turn the bulb socket with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘 Insert the new bulb into the bulb
socket.
왘 Place the bulb socket back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
왘 To reinstall the lamp, set the rear end in
the bumper and let the front end
engage.
350

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 왘 Reinstall the bulb carrier and lock it
again with latch 1.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
왘 Reinstall the trim panel.
lamp, do the following first:
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to License plate lamp
position M (컄 page 109).
왘 Open the trunk lid (컄 page 92).
Tail lamp unit

Bulb carrier
2 Brake lamp bulb
3 Backup lamp bulb
4 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only),
tail and standing lamp bulb
5 Parking and side marker lamp bulb 1 Screw
6 Turn signal lamp bulb
왘 Loosen both screws 1.
왘 Press gently onto the respective bulb
and turn counterclockwise out of its 왘 Remove the license plate lamp.
1 Latch bulb socket. 왘 Replace the bulb.
왘 Fold the corresponding trim panel to 왘 Press the new bulb gently into its bulb 왘 Reinstall the license plate lamp.
the side. socket and turn clockwise until it
왘 Retighten screws 1.
engages.
왘 Turn latch 1 to vertical position and
remove the bulb carrier.
351

Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing wiper blades 왘 Pull the tab in direction of arrow 1 and !

remove wiper blade. Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward.
Warning! G Installing wiper blades
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from 왘 Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on wiper arm back. If released, the force
starter switch before replacing a wiper the wiper arm (see arrows). of the impact from the tensioning
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly spring could crack the windshield.
왘 Slide the tab back in the direction of
turn on and cause injury. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
arrow 2 until it audibly engages.
the windshield glass without a wiper
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. blade inserted.
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
왘 Fold wiper arm forward. to the wiper when folding the wiper arm Make certain that the wiper blades are
back. properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
1 Unlock
2 Lock
352

Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Mounting the spare wheel
Warning! G
왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from
The dimensions of the spare wheel moving traffic on a hard surface. Preparing the vehicle
(Minispare or collapsible tire) are different Prepare the vehicle as described
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher
from those of the road wheels. As a result, (컄 page 353).
(컄 page 114).
the vehicle handling characteristics change
Vehicles with Minispare wheel:
when driving with a spare wheel mounted. 왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the
Adapt your driving style accordingly. front wheels are in a straight ahead 왘 Take the wheel wrench, the wheel
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
position. bolts, and the jack out of the trunk
When driving with spare wheel mounted, 왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 54). (컄 page 329).
ensure proper tire pressure and do not ex- 왘 Take the Minispare wheel out of the
왘 Move the gear selector lever to P
ceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). trunk (컄 page 333).
(manual transmission to first or reverse
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center gear). Vehicles with collapsible tire
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel (C 55 AMG only):
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 56).
replaced with a regular road wheel.
왘 Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench,
Never operate the vehicle with more than wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump
one spare wheel mounted.
switch.
out of the trunk (컄 page 330).
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
i
Open doors only when conditions are
safe to do so.
353

Practical hints
Flat tire
Lifting the vehicle

왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Warning! G
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
or other sizable objects. up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
One wheel chock is included with the built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 329). avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
When changing wheel on a level surface:
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
another sizable object behind the the area under the lifted vehicle. Always 왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the firmly set parking brake and block wheels not yet remove the wheel bolts
wheel being changed. before raising vehicle with jack. (approximately one full turn with
When changing wheel on a hill: Do not disengage parking brake while the wrench).
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
왘 Place the wheel chock and another
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
sizable object on the downhill side
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
354

Practical hints
Flat tire
The jack take-up brackets are located Removing the wheel

directly behind the front wheel housings
and in front of the rear wheel housings.
왘 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a

maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the 1 Alignment bolt
ground. Never start engine while
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
1 Take-up bracket vehicle is raised.
remove.
2 Jack
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
왘 Place jack 2 on firm ground. Warning! G bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘 Position jack 2 under take-up
The jack is intended only for lifting the 왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
(plumb-line) as seen from the side, !
suited for performing maintenance work
even if the vehicle is parked on an Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
under the vehicle.
incline. This could result in damage to the bolts
앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
and wheel hub threads.
앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
왘 Remove the wheel.
355

Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and

wheel hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
Warning! G
왘 Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Always replace wheel bolts that are bolt and push it on.
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel, damaged or rusted.
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
collapsible tire, or other steel rims Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. slightly.
(located in trunk with spare wheel) Damaged wheel hub threads should be
! repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
mounting the Minispare wheel,
Roadside Assistance.
collapsible tire, or other steel rims. The
use of any wheel bolts other than wheel Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel, ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
collapsible tire, or other steel rims will come off. This could cause an accident.
physically damage the vehicle’s Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
brakes.
356

Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflating the collapsible tire 왘 Take the electric air pump out of the
(C 55 AMG only) trunk (컄 page 331).
Warning! G
Vehicles with collapsible tire
(C 55 AMG only):
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
wheel bolt and tighten slightly. pump (컄 page 357) before lowering the
vehicle. 1 Flap
Warning! G 2 On/off switch
3 Electrical plug
Only use genuine equipment Warning! G 4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel screw
bolts may come loose. Observe instructions on air pump label. 5 Union nut
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the 왘 Open flap 1 on electric air pump.
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle ! 왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
could fall of the jack. Do not lower the vehicle before with pressure gauge 4.
inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise
왘 Remove the valve cap from the
the rim may be damaged.
collapsible tire valve. 컄컄
357

Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄왘 Screw air hose 4 onto the collapsible !

tire valve. Do not operate the electric air pump Warning! G
왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle longer than six minutes without inter-
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
cigarette lighter socket. ruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch You may operate the electric air pump can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
to position 1. again after it has cooled off. cause they are more likely to become punc-
왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2. tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2. etc.
The electric air pump should now
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
switch on and inflate the collapsible
tire. to position 0. wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
왘 If the tire pressure is above 36 psi and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
왘 Inflate the tire to approximately 36 psi
(2.5 bar), release excess tire pressure from being overheated.
(2.5 bar).
using the vent screw.
This takes about five minutes for the 왘 Detach the electric air pump.
collapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union
nut 5 can become hot duration infla- 왘 Store the electrical plug and the air
tion. Exercise proper caution to avoid hose behind the flap and place the
burning yourself when using the equip- electric air pump back in the trunk.
ment.
358

Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle

Warning! G
Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
Vehicles with collapsible tire
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
(C 55 AMG only):
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
Before storing the jack, it should be fully
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
pump (컄 page 357) before lowering the ve- 1-5 Wheel bolts position) (컄 page 331).
hicle.
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, 왘 Store the jack and the other vehicle
following the diagonal sequence tools in the trunk.
왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
counterclockwise until vehicle is tight. Observe a tightening torque
resting fully on its own weight. of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
왘 Remove the jack.
359

Practical hints
Battery
The battery is located in the engine !

compartment on the right hand side. Warning! G Never loosen or detach battery termi-
nal clamps while the engine is running
Failure to follow these instructions can
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
result in severe injury or death.
Otherwise the alternator and other
Observe all safety instructions and electronic components could be se-
precautions when handling automotive verely damaged.
batteries (컄 page 284).
Have the battery checked regularly by
Never lean over batteries while connecting, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
you might get injured.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not maintenance intervals or contact an
1 Clamps allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately further information.
Removing filter box: flush affected area with water and seek
왘 Release clamps 1. medical help if necessary.
왘 Remove filter box. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, Warning! G
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Installing filter box: flames or sparks away from battery, avoid Do not place metal objects on the battery as
왘 Insert filter box properly. improper connection of jumper cables, this could result in a short circuit.
smoking, etc. Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
왘 Secure it with clamps 1.
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
360

Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery Charging and reinstalling the battery

Warning! G
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 56). 왘 Charge battery in accordance with the
With a disconnected battery instructions of the battery charger
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
앫 you will no longer be able to turn the manufacturer.
SmartKey in the starter switch 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
앫 the gear selector lever will remain 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 278). the previously described steps in
locked in position P 왘 Remove the filter box (컄 page 360). reverse order.
왘 Disconnect the battery negative lead

from negative terminal 1. Warning! G
왘 Remove cover 2 from the positive Never charge a battery while still installed in
terminal. the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead. ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Removing the battery
왘 Remove the screw-nuts securing the

battery.
1 Negative terminal
왘 Remove the battery bracket.
2 Positive terminal cover
왘 Take out the battery.
361

Practical hints
Battery
Reconnecting the battery i Batteries contain materials that can harm

The following procedures must be the environment if disposed of improperly.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
carried out following any interruption of
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. battery power (e.g. due to reconnec- lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
tion): method of disposal. Many states require
왘 Connect the battery positive lead and sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
fasten its cover 2. 앫 Set the clock (컄 page 137). for recycling.
왘 Connect the battery negative lead. Vehicles with COMAND*:
See COMAND operator’s manual.
! 앫 Synchronize side windows
NEVER invert the terminal connections! (컄 page 226).
앫 Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof*
왘 Reinstall the filter box (컄 page 360). (컄 page 230).
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
362

Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can !
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the Jump starting may only be performed
battery of another vehicle. Observe the on the battery installed in the engine
Failure to follow these directions will cause following: compartment.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic con- attempts.
verter are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting Do not attempt to start the engine
or jump starting, you might get injured. 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is using a battery quick charge unit.
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not If engine does not run after several
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately same voltage rating (12 V). Jump checked at the nearest authorized
flush affected area with water, and seek starting with a more powerful battery Mercedes-Benz Center.
medical help if necessary. could damage the vehicle’s electrical
system, which will not be covered by Excessive unburned fuel generated by
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, repeated failed starting attempts may
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep damage the catalytic converter and
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient may present a fire risk.
improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal
smoking, etc. clamps. Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
can result in it exploding, causing personal are not on or near pulleys, fans, or oth- Make sure the cable clamps do not
injury. er parts that move when an engine is touch any other metal part while the
started or running. other end is still attached to a battery.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
363

Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Connect negative terminal 4 of the

Warning! G charged battery with negative under
hood terminal 3 in front of the
Keep flames or sparks away from battery. discharged battery with the jumper
Do not smoke. cables. Clamp cable to charged
Observe all safety instructions and precau- battery 4 first.
tions when handling automotive batteries 왘 Start the engine of the disabled
(컄 page 284). vehicle.
You can now again turn on the electrical
The battery is located in the engine
1 Positive terminal of charged battery consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
compartment on the right hand side. The
2 Positive under hood terminal in front of any circumstances.
terminals for jump starting are located in
discharged battery 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
front of the battery.
3 Negative under hood terminal in front negative terminals 4 and 3 and then
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not of discharged battery from positive terminals 1 and 2.
touch. 4 Negative terminal of charged battery
You can now turn on the lights.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Connect positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery with positive under 왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
왘 Apply parking brake.
hood terminal 2 in front of the est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Shift gear selector lever to position P discharged battery with the jumper
(manual transmission to Neutral). !
cables. Clamp cable to charged
battery 1 first. Vehicles with automatic transmission
and/or 4MATIC:
왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the Do not tow-start the vehicle.
charged battery and run at idle speed.
364

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the When circumstances do not permit the !
vehicle be transported with all wheels off recommended towing methods, the If the vehicle is towed with the front
the ground using flatbed or appropriate vehicle may be towed with all wheels on axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is the ground or front wheels raised (except with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut
preferable to other types of towing. vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as off (SmartKey in starter switch
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
! safe location where the recommended immediately be engaged and will apply
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- towing methods can be employed. the rear wheel brakes.
ment with the SmartKey in the starter
switch turned to position 0. ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels
Vehicles with automatic transmission on the ground, the gear selector lever
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. must be in position N (manual trans-
and/or 4MATIC:
Towing with sling-type equipment over mission: gears disengaged) and the
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
bumpy roads will damage radiator and SmartKey must be in starter switch
supports. position 2.
!
To prevent damage during transport,
Vehicles with 4MATIC: When towing the vehicle with all wheels
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing on the ground or the front axle raised,
suspension parts.
so could damage the transfer case, the vehicle may be towed only for
Switch off the tow-away alarm* which is not covered by the distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and
(컄 page 85) and deactivate the auto- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
matic central locking (컄 page 145). (50 km/h).
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
365

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! i
To be certain to avoid a possibility of Warning! G To signal turns while being towed with
damage to the drivetrain, however, we the hazard warning flasher in use,
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
recommend the drive shaft be discon- switch on ignition and activate the
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
nected at the rear axle drive flange combination switch for the left or right
with a tow bar if:
(vehicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at turn signal in the usual manner – only
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for 앫 the engine will not run the selected turn signal will operate.
any towing beyond a short tow to a 앫 there is a malfunction in the power
Upon canceling the turn signal, the
nearby garage. supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
hazard warning flasher will operate
system
again.
as that will be necessary to adequately
control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert.
366

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! i
Warning! G When towing the vehicle with all wheels If the battery is disconnected or
on the ground, please note the discharged
following:
power assistance for the brake and steering 앫 the SmartKey will not turn in the
systems. In this case, it is important to keep With the automatic central locking starter switch. For more informa-
in mind that a considerably higher degree of activated and the SmartKey in starter tion, see “Battery” (컄 page 360)
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- switch position 2, the vehicle doors and “Jump starting” (컄 page 363).
hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. lock if the left front wheel as well as the
앫 the gear selector lever will remain
right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
locked in position P. For informa-
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
tion on manually unlocking the
more.
transmission gear selector lever
Switch off the tow-away alarm* see (컄 page 340).
(컄 page 85).
To prevent the vehicle doors from
locking, deactivate the automatic
central locking (컄 page 145).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed
towing eye bolt. Never attach tow
cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle
chassis, frame or suspension parts.
367

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt Removing cover

왘 Press mark on cover 1 or 2 in
direction of arrows.
왘 Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the compartment under-
neath the trunk floor).
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper. 왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper.
Reinstalling cover
왘 Fit cover 1 or 2 and snap into place.
368

Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to ! Aids for changing fuses
stop the supply of electricity to a device Only install fuses that have been tested
that is malfunctioning. This helps to and approved by Mercedes-Benz and Fuse chart
prevent damage to the other vehicle that have the specified amperage
electronics. rating. The fuse chart is found in the main fuse
box in the passenger compartment
The following aids are available to help you Otherwise, electrical parts or systems (컄 page 370). The amperages of the fuses
change fuses (컄 page 369): could be damaged. are also given there.
앫 Fuse chart Never attempt to repair or bridge a
앫 Spare fuses blown fuse. Have the cause determined Spare fuses
and remedied by an authorized Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit
앫 Fuse extractor
Mercedes-Benz Center. in the spare wheel well (컄 page 329).
Warning! G The electrical fuses are located in different Fuse extractor

fuse boxes:
Only use fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz The fuse extractor is found in the fuse box
with the specified amperage for the system 앫 Main fuse box in passenger cover in the trunk (컄 page 371).
in question. Otherwise, a short circuit could compartment (컄 page 370)
result and cause a fire. 앫 Fuse box in engine compartment
(컄 page 370)
앫 Fuse box in trunk (컄 page 371)
369

Practical hints
Fuses
Main fuse box in passenger Closing fuse box Removing cover

compartment
왘 Attach fuse box cover 1 in the front. 왘 Twist screws 2
90° counterclockwise.
The main fuse box is located in the passen- 왘 Fold fuse box cover 1 in until it
ger compartment on the driver’s side of engages. 왘 Lift the rear of cover 1.
the cockpit. 왘 Slide out retainer 3 and remove
Fuse box in engine compartment cover 1 by pulling towards front.
The fuse box is located in the engine
Opening fuse box
compartment on the driver’s side.
1 Main fuse box cover
Opening fuse box

왘 Open the driver’s door. 4 Fuse box cover
1 Cover
5 Clamps
왘 Pull fuse box cover 1 open with a 2 Screws
screw driver or similar tool (see arrow). 3 Retainer 왘 With a dry cloth, remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
왘 Remove fuse box cover 1 rearward.
왘 Release clamps 5.
왘 Remove fuse box cover 4.
370

Practical hints
Fuses
Closing fuse box Fuse box in trunk Opening fuse box

왘 Make sure that the sealing rubber is 왘 Pull away trim panel 1.
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind
properly positioned.
the left-hand trim panel. 왘 Remove fuse box cover 3.
왘 Press fuse box cover 4 down and
secure with clamps 5. Closing fuse box
왘 Insert fuse box cover 3 until it
Installing cover engages.
왘 Insert cover 1 sideways into
왘 Insert trim panel 1.
retainer 3.
왘 Twist screws 2 90° clockwise.
1 Trim panel
2 Fuse extractor
3 Fuse box cover
371

372

Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information
373

Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300000 different parts for could compromise the vehicle’s
Mercedes-Benz models are available. durability or safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject
to stringent quality inspections. Each part
has been specifically developed, manufac-
tured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
374

Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the “warranties” printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your autho- Accessories warranties, copies of which
rized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange are available at any Mercedes-Benz Should you lose your Service and Warranty
or repair any defective parts originally in- Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
stalled in the vehicle in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
the terms of the following warranties: replacement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
375

Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission
standards
4 Engine number (engraved on engine)
5 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
6 Vacuum line routing diagram label
When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
376

Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
C 230 Kompressor (all models) C 240 (all models)/C 320 (all models)/
C 55 AMG
1 Power steering pump

2 Idler pulley 1 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Supercharger 2 Power steering pump
4 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Air conditioning compressor
5 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft
6 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump
7 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator)
8 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley
377

Technical data
Engine
Model C 230 Kompressor (203.040)1 (Canada only) C 240 (203.061)1

C 230 Kompressor Sport (203.040)1 C 240 4MATIC (203.081)1
Engine 271 112
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 4 6
Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm) 3.54 in (89.90 mm)
Stroke 3.35 in (85.00 mm) 2.68 in (68.20 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 109.6 cu in (1796 cm ) 158.5 cu in (2597 cm3)
Compression ratio 8.5:1 10.5:1
2
Output acc. 189 hp/5800 rpm 168 hp/5500 rpm 2
to SAE J 1349 (141 kW/5800 rpm) (125 kW/5500 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. 192 lb-ft/3500 - 4000 rpm 177 lb-ft/4500 rpm
to SAE J 1349 (260 Nm/3500 - 4000 rpm) (240 Nm/4500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6200 rpm
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2420 mm 2380 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
378

Technical data
Engine
Model C 320 (203.064)1 (USA only) C 55 AMG (203.076)1

C 320 Sport (203.064)1
C 320 4MATIC (203.084)1
Engine 112 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.60 in (92.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 195.2 cu in (3199 cm ) 331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 11:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 215 hp/5700 rpm 362 hp/5750 rpm 2
(160 kW/5700 rpm) (270 kW/5750 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 229 lb-ft/3000 - 4600 rpm 376 lb-ft/4000 rpm
(310 Nm/3000 - 4600 rpm) (510 Nm/4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6700 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2380 mm 2380 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
379

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Only use tires and rims which have been ! i

specifically developed for your vehicle and Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental exhibit dimensional variations and Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
effects, such as different tire deformation characteris- pressure table is located on the fuel
앫 poor handling characteristics tics that could cause them to come into filler flap of the vehicle. The tire pres-
contact with the vehicle body or axle sure should be checked regularly and
앫 increased noise
parts. Damage to the tires or the should only be adjusted on cold tires.
앫 increased fuel consumption vehicle may be the result. Follow tire manufacturer’s mainte-
nance recommendation included with
vehicle.
380

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Same size tires
Model C 230 Kompressor (Canada only) C 55 AMG

C 230 Kompressor Sport
C 240
C 240 4MATIC
C 320 (USA only)
C 320 Sport
C 320 4MATIC
Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2 71/2 J x 17
Wheel offset 1.22 in (31 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91H -
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - -
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91H M+S 205/50 R17 89H M+S
or
225/45 R17 91H M+S1
1 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
381

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
Model C 230 Kompressor Sport C 55 AMG

C 320 Sport
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 71/2 J x 17 H2 71/2 J x 18 H2
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 225/45 R17 91W 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL or Extra Load1
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 81/2 J x 17 H2 81/2 J x 18 H2
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 R17 91W1 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL or Extra Load1
1 Must not be used with snow chains.
382

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Minispare wheel
Model C 230 Kompressor (Canada only) C 230 Kompressor Sport

C 240 C 320 Sport
C 240 4MATIC
C 320 (USA only)
C 320 4MATIC
Rim (steel) 3.5 B x 16 H2 3.5 B x 17 H2
1
Tire T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/80 R17 99M1
1 Must not be used with snow chains.
Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only)
Model C 55 AMG
Rim (steel) 4.5 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset 0.47 in (12 mm)
Tire 145/70-17 92P1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
383

Technical data
Electrical system
Model C 230 Kompressor (all models) C 240 (all models) C 55 AMG

C 320 (all models)
Generator (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/120 A 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.1 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 14 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 6 MPP 332 Bosch F 8 DPP 332 NGK ILFR 6 A
NGK PFR 5 R-11
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)
384

Technical data
Main dimensions
왔 Main dimensions
Model C 230 Kompressor C 230 Kompressor Sport C 55 AMG
C 240 C 320 Sport
C 240 4MATIC
C 320
C 320 4MATIC
Overall vehicle length 178.4 in (4531 mm) 178.4 in (4531 mm) 181.8 in (4617 mm)
Overall vehicle width 68.0 in (1728 mm) 68.0 in (1728 mm) 68.7 in (1744 mm)
Overall vehicle height 56.3 in (1429 mm) 55.6 in (1413 mm) 55.6 in (1412 mm)
Wheelbase 106.9 in (2715 mm) 106.9 in (2715 mm) 106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front 59.3 in (1505 mm) 59.3 in (1505 mm) 59.3 in (1507 mm)
Track, rear 58.1 in (1476 mm) 58.1 in (1476 mm) 58.0 in (1474 mm)
385

Technical data
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
386

Technical data
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities lubricants must match. Therefore only use Please refer to the Factory Approved
brands tested and approved by Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
Vehicle components and their respective Mercedes-Benz. your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter C 230 Kompressor (all models) 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) Approved engine oils
C 240 7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
C 240 4MATIC 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
C 320 7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
C 320 4MATIC 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
C 320 Sport 7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
C 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Automatic transmission C 230 Kompressor (all models) 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
C 240 (all models) 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
C 55 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.7 l)
Manual transmission 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Manual Transmission Oil
Rear axle C 230 Kompressor (all models) 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
C 55 AMG 1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
387

Technical data

Front axle C 240 4MATIC 0.5 US qt (0.46 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
C 320 4MATIC
Transfer case C 240 4MATIC approx. 0.62 US qt (0.59 l) MB Transfer case fluid
C 320 4MATIC
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system C 230 Kompressor (all models) approx. 5.9 US qt (5.6 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent
C 240 (all models) approx. 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
C 320 (all models) approx. 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
C 55 AMG approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l)
Fuel tank 16.4 US gal (62.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Minimum Posted Octane 91
a reserve of (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (identified by a label
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on
fuel filler flap):
Alternative fuel: Ethanol fuel (E85)
388

Technical data

Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil
(never R-12)
Windshield washer 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer and 6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 396).
389

Technical data
Engine oils Please follow Maintenance System Brake fluid

(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles)
Engine oils are specifically tested for their recommendations for scheduled oil During vehicle operation, the boiling point
suitability in our engines and durability for changes. Failure to do so will result in of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
our service intervals. Therefore, only use engine damage not covered by the through the absorption of moisture from
approved engine oils and oil filters Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
required for vehicles with Maintenance ous operating conditions, this moisture
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada Engine oil additives content can lead to the formation of
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine bubbles in the system, thus reducing the
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. system’s efficiency.
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or They may damage the engine.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Damage or malfunctions resulting from replaced every two years, preferably in the
Center.
blending oil additives are not covered by spring.
Using engine oils and oil filters of the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Only brake fluid approved by
specification other than those expressly
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
required for the Maintenance System Air conditioning refrigerant
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or
provide you with additional information.
changing of oil and oil filter at change R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
intervals longer than those called for by lubricating oil is used in the air
the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or conditioning system.
FSS (Canada Vehicles) will result in engine Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
damage not covered by the lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. system will occur.
390

Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates

such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
! i used provided the ratio of any one of these
To maintain the engine’s durability and Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a oxygenates to gasoline does not
performance, premium unleaded gaso- label reading Premium gasoline or exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
line must be used. If premium unleaded E85 only! are designed to operate on The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not
is not available and low octane fuel is premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
used, follow these precautions: fuel (E85) or any mixture of these two.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially For more information, see “Flexible not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
filled with unleaded regular and fill Fuel Vehicles” (컄 page 392). Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can
up with premium unleaded as soon be used.
as possible. Only use premium unleaded fuel: These blends must also meet all other fuel
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt 앫 The octane number (posted at the requirements, such as resistance to spark
acceleration. pump) must be 91 min. It is an average knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of of both the Research (R) octane num-
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
with a light load such as two (R+M)/2. This is also known as the
persons and no luggage. ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum
accelerator pedal position if the
vehicle is fully loaded or operating
in mountainous terrain.
391

Technical data
Gasoline additives In areas where carbon deposits may be Flexible Fuel Vehicles
encountered due to lack of availability of
A major concern among engine gasolines which contain these additives, Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of label reading Premium gasoline or E85
by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved by us for use on only! on fuel filler flap.
only the use of quality gasoline containing Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory These vehicles are designed to operate on
additives that prevent the build up of Approved Service Products pamphlet for a premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol
carbon deposits. listing of approved product(s). Follow fuel (E85), or on any mixture of these two.
After an extended period of using fuels directions on product label.
Ethanol fuel (E85) is a mixture of
without such additives, carbon deposits Do not blend any specific fuel additives approximately 85% Ethanol and 15%
can build up especially on the intake valves with fuel. This only results in unnecessary unleaded gasoline.
and in the combustion area, leading to cost and may be harmful to engine
engine performance problems such as: operation.
앫 Warm-up hesitation
Warning! G
Damage or malfunction resulting from
앫 Unstable idle poor fuel quality or from blending Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly
additional fuel additives other than those flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha-
앫 Knocking/pinging tested and approved by us for use on nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited
앫 Misfire Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the or if you come into contact with it or inhale
Factory Approved Service Products fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of Ethanol
앫 Power loss
pamphlet are not covered by the fumes and skin contact with Ethanol. Extin-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. guish all open flames before fueling. Never
smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol.
392

Technical data
Switching fuels If in spite of these recommendations the Hot weather performance

engine does not perform properly, adding
For best performance and driveability it is At ambient temperatures above 95°F
more gasoline [at least 3 gallons
recommended to use either one or the (35°C) start times may increase and be
(12 liters)] to the fuel may improve the
other fuel. A refueling pattern that accompanied by a rough idle following the
engine behavior.
alternates between the two different fuels start.
should be avoided if possible.
Cold weather performance
Cruising range
When switching fuels, make sure:
It is possible that starting times will signif-
앫 Fuel level is below half full. E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon
icantly increase at temperatures
than gasoline. To make sure that engine
앫 Fuel level is above reserve (fuel reserve below 32°F (0°C). At low temperatures
performance with Ethanol fuel is similar to
warning lamp is not lit). the use of a block heater (Canada only) is
that when using gasoline, the engine must
recommended (see an authorized
앫 Amount of added fuel is more than burn more Ethanol fuel. As a result, it is to
Mercedes-Benz Center for further
5 gallons (20 liters). be expected that the fuel consumption will
information). Rough idling may also be
increase when using E85 compared to
앫 Ignition is off during refill. experienced at such temperatures before
gasoline operation.
the engine is fully warmed up.
앫 Immediately after refueling engine is
started and operated for at least five i
!
minutes. Use of E85 may reduce your driving
E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when
range.
These precautions and recommendations ambient temperatures fall below 14°F
are supposed to prevent any difficulties (-10°C).
Maintenance
when starting and operating the engine
which otherwise may be experienced Please inform your Mercedes-Benz Center
before the engine has fully adapted to the if you use or have used E85 fuel when your
different fuel. vehicle is delivered for maintenance or
repairs.
393

Technical data
Coolants The coolant solution must be used If you use a solution that is more than 55%
year-round to provide the necessary corro- anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
The engine coolant is a mixture of water sion protection and increase boil-over protection to approx. -49°F (-45°C)], the
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet engine temperature will increase due to
provides: for replacement interval. the lower heat transfer capability of the
앫 Corrosion protection solution. Therefore, do not use more than
Coolant system design and coolant used
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
앫 Freeze protection determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the If the coolant level is low, water and
앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
boiling point) if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze be used to bring it up to the proper level
The cooling system was filled at the factory solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved (have cooling system checked for signs of
with a coolant providing freeze protection products of equal specification (see leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and Factory Approved Service Products in accordance with label instructions.
corrosion protection. pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant
The water in the cooling system must meet
concentration or bring it back up to the
If the antifreeze mixture is effective minimum requirements, which are usually
proper level.
to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
coolant in the pressurized cooling system To provide important corrosion protection, are not sure about the water quality,
is reached at approx. 266°F (130°C). the solution must be at least 45% consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to Center.
freeze protection to approx. -22°F
(-30°C)].
394

Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze Failure to use such anticorrosion/anti- Before the start of the winter season (or
freeze coolant will result in a significantly once a year in hot southern regions), you
Your vehicle contains a number of
shortened service life. should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum
concentration checked. The coolant is also
components in motor vehicle engines Therefore, the following product is strongly
regularly checked each time you bring your
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze recommended for use in your vehicle:
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
coolant used in such engines be specifi- Mercedes-Benz 325.0
Center for service.
cally formulated to protect the aluminum Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
parts.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

–35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C)
C 230 Kompressor (all models) 3.0 US qt (2.8 l) 3.3 US qt (3.1 l)
C 240 (all models) 3.4 US qt (3.2 l) 3.8 US qt (3.6 l)
C 320 (all models) 3.4 US qt (3.2 l) 3.8 US qt (3.6 l)
C 55 AMG 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
395

Technical data
Windshield washer and headlamp 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “S” and water mixing ratio
(or concentrate and commercially
For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield washer and headlamp available premixed windshield washer
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
cleaning system* are supplied from the solvent/antifreeze, depending on
and water:
windshield washer fluid reservoir. ambient temperatures).
앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts water
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx.: Warning! G (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l]
water)
앫 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without
headlamp cleaning system* Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- For temperatures below freezing point, use
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
앫 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and commercially available premixed
headlamp cleaning system* and burn. You could be seriously burned. windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l]
solvent)
396

Technical data
왔 Consumer information
The following text is published as required Treadwear Traction
of all manufacturers of passenger cars
The treadwear grade is a comparative The traction grades, from highest to lowest
under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal
rating based on the wear rate of the tire are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
when tested under controlled conditions represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety
on a specified government test course. For pavement as measured under controlled
Act of 1966”.
example, a tire graded 150 would wear conditions on specified government test
one and one-half (11/2) times as well on surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Uniform tire quality grading
the government course as a tire marked C may have poor traction
graded 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found, where
tires depends upon the actual conditions
applicable, on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
Warning! G
width. For example:
tions in driving habits, service practices The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Treadwear Traction Temperature and differences in road characteristics and based on straight ahead braking traction
climate. tests, and does not include acceleration,
200 AA A
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
397

Technical data
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
Warning! G
highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s The temperature grade for this tire is
resistance to the generation of heat and its established for a tire that is properly inflated
ability to dissipate heat when tested under and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
controlled conditions on a specified indoor underinflation, or excessive loading, either
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high separately or in combination, can cause
temperature can cause the material of the excessive heat build-up and possible tire
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
398

Technical terms
ABS BabySmartTM compatible child seats CAC

(Antilock Brake System) Special restraint system for children. (Customer Assistance Center)
Prevents the wheels from locking up The sensor system for the passenger Mercedes-Benz customer service
during braking so that the vehicle can seat prevents deployment of the center, which can help you with any
continue to be steered. passenger front air bag if a questions about your vehicle and
BabySmartTM compatible child seat is provide assistance in the event of a
Alignment bolt
installed. breakdown.
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire BAS CAN system
to align the wheel with the wheel hub. (Brake Assist System) (Controller Area Network)
System for potentially reducing braking Data bus network serving to control
BabySmartTM1 air bag deactivation
distances in emergency braking vehicle functions such as door locking
system
situations. The system is activated or windshield wiping depending on
This system detects if a special system
when it senses an emergency based on vehicle settings and/or ambient
compatible child restraint seat is
how fast the brake is applied. conditions.
installed on the front passenger seat.
The system will automatically Bi-Xenon headlamps* Cockpit
deactivate the passenger front air bag Headlamps which use an electric arc as All instruments, switches, buttons and
when such a seat is properly installed the light source and produce a more indicator/warning lamps in the
(the 56 indicator lamp located intense light than filament headlamps. passenger compartment needed for
in the center console comes on). See Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low vehicle operation and monitoring.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center beam and high beam.
for availability.

Automotive Corp.
399

Technical terms
COMAND* Engine number FSS (Canada vehicles)

(Cockpit Management and Data The number set by the manufacturer (Flexible Service System)
System) and placed on the cylinder block to Maintenance service indicator in the
Information and operating center for uniquely identify each engine multifunction display that informs the
vehicle sound and communications produced. driver when the next vehicle mainte-
systems, including the radio and the nance service is due. FSS evaluates
Engine oil viscosity
navigation system, as well as other engine temperature, oil level, vehicle
Measurement for the inner friction
optional equipment (CD changer*, speed, engine speed, distance driven
(viscosity) of the oil at different temper-
telephone*, etc.). and the time elapsed since your last
atures. The higher the temperature an
maintenance service, and calls for the
Control system oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
next maintenance service accordingly.
The control system is used to call up or the lower the temperature it can
vehicle information and to change tolerate without becoming viscous, the Gear range
component settings. Information and better the viscosity. Number of gears which are available to
messages appear in the multifunction the automatic transmission for shifting.
ESP
display. The driver uses the buttons on The automatic gear shifting process
(Electronic Stability Program)
the multifunction steering wheel to can be adapted to specific operating
Improves vehicle handling and
navigate through the system and to conditions using the gear selector
directional stability.
adjust settings. lever.
ETD
Cruise control (Emergency Tensioning Device) GPS
Driving convenience system that Device which deploys in certain frontal (Global Positioning System)
automatically maintains the vehicle and rear collisions exceeding the Satellite-based system for relaying
speed set by the driver. system's threshold to tighten the geographic location information to and
seat belts. from vehicles equipped with special
->SRS receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
400

Technical terms
Instrument cluster Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Multifunction display

The displays and indicator/warning Maintenance service indicator in the Display field in the instrument cluster
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, multifunction display that informs the used to present information provided
including the tachometer, speedo- driver when the next vehicle mainte- by the control system.
meter, engine temperature display and nance service is due. The Maintenance
fuel gauge. System in your vehicle tracks distance
Steering wheel with buttons for
driven and the time elapsed since your
Kickdown operating the control system.
last maintenance service, and calls for
Depressing the accelerator past the
the next maintenance service accord- Overspeed range
point of resistance shifts the transmis-
ingly. Engine speeds within the red marking
sion down to the lowest possible gear.
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this
This very quickly accelerates the Memory function*
engine speed range, as it may result in
vehicle and should not be used for Used to store three individual seat,
serious engine damage that is not
normal acceleration needs. steering wheel and mirror positions for
each SmartKey.
Lock button Warranty.
Button on the door which indicates MON Poly-V-belt drive
whether the door is locked or (Motor Octane Number) Drives engine-components (alternator,
unlocked. Pushing the lock button The Motor Octane Number for gasoline AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
down on an individual door from inside as determined by a standardized
will lock that door. method. It is an indication of a
gasoline's ability to resist undesired
detonation (knocking). The average of
both the MON (Motor Octane Number)
and ->RON (Research Octane Number)
is posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
401

Technical terms
Power train REST Shift lock

Collective term designating all (Residual engine heat utilization) When the vehicle is parked, this lock
components used to generate and Feature that uses the engine heat prevents the transmission gear
transmit motive power to the drive stored in the coolant to heat the selector lever from being moved out of
axles, including vehicle interior for a short time after position P without SmartKey turned
the engine has been turned off. and brake pedal depressed.
앫 engine
Restraint systems SRS
앫 clutch/torque converter
Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags (Supplemental Restraint System)
앫 transmission and child restraint systems. As inde- Seat belts, emergency tensioning
앫 transfer case pendent systems, their protective device and air bags. Though indepen-
functions complement one another. dent systems, they are closely inter-
앫 drive shaft faced to provide effective occupant
RON
앫 differential protection.
(Research Octane Number)
앫 axle shafts/axles The Research Octane Number for gaso-
line as determined by a standardized
Program mode selector switch
method. It is an indication of a gaso-
Used to switch the automatic
line's ability to resist undesired deto-
transmission* between standard
nation (knocking). The average of both
operation S, comfort operation C and
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
manual operation M (C 55 AMG only).
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
402

Technical terms
Tele Aid* System Telematics* VIN

(Telematic Alarm Identification on A combination of the terms “tele- (Vehicle Identification Number)
Demand) communications” and “informatics”. The number set by the manufacturer
The Tele Aid system consists of three and placed on the body to uniquely
Tightening torque
types of response: automatic and identify each vehicle produced.
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
manual emergency, roadside assis-
wrench) with which threaded fasteners Voice control system*1
tance and information. Tele Aid is
such as wheel bolts are tightened. Voice control system for car phones,
initially activated by completing a
portable cell phones and audio
subscriber agreement and placing an Tire speed rating
systems (radio, CD, etc.).
acquaintance call. Part of tire designation; indicates the
The Tele Aid system is operational speed range for which a tire is
provided that the vehicle’s battery is approved.
charged, properly connected, not Traction
damaged and cellular and GPS Force exerted by the vehicle on the
coverage is available. road via the tires.
1 Feature description is based on preliminary infor-

mation at time of printing. At time of printing, no
date for availability of voice control had been set.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details and availability for your vehicle model.
403

404

Index
A Exterior headlamps 49 Adjusting 35

ABS 77, 399 Exterior lamps 110 Air distribution 178
ABS control 77 Exterior rear view mirror Air volume 178
Indicator lamp 25 parking position* 170 Backrest contour 104
Malfunction indicator lamp 302 Hazard warning flasher 114 Backrest side bolsters 104
Messages in display 310 Headlamps 49 Backrest tilt, manual seat 36
Accelerator position, High beam headlamps 50 Backrest tilt, power seat* 38
automatic transmission* 163 High beams 113 Exterior rear view mirrors 41
Accident Ignition 33 Folding back rear seat
In case of 53 Immobilizer 56, 83 head restraints, electrical 102
Activating Low beam headlamps 49 Folding back rear seat
Air conditioning (cooling) 181 Manual shift program head restraints, manual 102
Air recirculation mode 179 (C 55 AMG only) 166 Head restraint height,
Anti-theft alarm system* 84 Rear window defroster 173 manual seat 37
Central locking (control system) 145 Seat heating* 105 Head restraint height,
Climate control 175 Tow-away alarm* 85 power seat* 38
Climate control system 177 Windshield wipers 51 Head restraint height, rear seats 101
Defrosting 178 Adding Head restraint tilt, manual seat 37
Easy-entry/exit feature* 146 Coolant 283 Head restraint tilt, power seat* 39
Electric air pump 358 Engine oil 281 Head restraint tilt, rear seats 103
ESP 81 Additional turn signals 345 Instrument cluster illumination 117
Adjustable air vents, Interior rear view mirror 41
rear passenger compartment 182 Manual seat 36
Mirrors 41
405

Index
Multicontour seat* 104 Adjusting air distribution Air recirculation mode 179
Placing upright rear seat and volume 178 Activating 179
head restraints 102 Adjusting sound functions 187 Deactivating 180
Power seat* 38 Adjusting the volume 187 Air vents, rear passenger compartment
Rear seat head restraints 101 Aids for changing fuses 369 Adjustable 182
Seat belt height 45 Air bags 59 Air volume
Seat cushion depth 104 BabySmartTM deactivation Adjusting 178
Seat cushion tilt, manual seat 36 system 70, 399 Alarm
Seat cushion tilt, power seat* 38 Children 60 Audible 76, 83
Seat fore and aft adjustment, Front 63 Canceling 84, 86
manual seat 36 Passenger 63 Visual 83
Seat fore and aft adjustment, Safety guidelines 62 Alarm system
power seat* 38 Side impact 64 Anti-theft* 83
Seat height, manual seat 36 Window curtain 64 Tow-away* 85
Seat height, power seat* 38 Air conditioning (cooling) 181 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 355, 399
Seats 35 Turning off 181 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 395
Steering column height, Turning on 181 Antiglare
electrical* 41 Air conditioning refrigerant 390 Automatic* 169
Steering column height, Air distribution Manual 168
manual 40 Adjusting 178 Antilock Brake System see ABS
Steering column length, Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Anti-theft alarm system*
electrical* 41 Air pump, electric Arming 84
Steering column length, Turning on 358 Canceling alarm 84
manual 40 Disarming 84
Steering wheel 39
406

Index
Anti-theft systems 83 Operation 186 Automatic transmission* 156

Anti-theft alarm system* 83 Radio operation 191 Accelerator position 163
Immobilizer 83 Switching off 187 Automatic shift program 162
Tow-away alarm* 85 Switching on 186 Emergency operation
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Telephone* operation 208 (Limp Home Mode) 167
Armrest Automatic antiglare* for rear view Fluid level 282
Changing inclination of 242 mirror 169 Gear ranges 159
Storage spaces 242 Automatic central locking Gear selector lever 47, 156
Armrest in rear passenger Activating/deactivating (control Gear selector lever position 156, 160
compartment 243 system) 145 Gear shifting malfunctions 167
Ashtrays 245 Automatic headlamp mode 110 Kickdown 163
ATF 282 Automatic lighting control Kickdown, manual shift program
AUDIO menu 127 Activating 115 (C 55 AMG only) 167
Selecting radio station 128 Deactivating 115 Manual shift program
Selecting satellite radio* station 128 Automatic locking when driving 96 (C 55 AMG only) 165
Audio system 183 Automatic shift program Manual shifting 158
Audio and telephone, operation 183 Automatic transmission* 162 One-touch gearshifting 158
Button and soft key operation 186 Automatic time change (Daylight Saving Program mode selector switch,
CD* operation 201 Time (DST) summer/winter) 139 automatic shift program 162
Operating and display elements 184 Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF Program mode selector switch,
Operating safety 183 manual shift program
(C 55 AMG only) 166
407

Index
Starting with 47 BAS 78, 399 Brake Assist System see BAS
Steering wheel gearshift control Messages in display 311 Brake fluid 390
(C 55 AMG only) 164 Batteries, SmartKey Checking 277
Transmission fluid 282 Changing 343 Message in display 315
Check lamp 90 Brake lamp bulbs 345
B
Checking 91 Brake lamp, high mounted 345
BabySmartTM
Battery discharged Brake lamps
Air bag deactivation system 70, 399
Jump starting 363 Messages in display 323
Compatible child seats 70, 399
Battery, vehicle 284, 360 Brake pads
Self-test 70
Charging 361 Message in display 315
Backrest
Disconnecting 361 Brakes 266
Folding forward 238
Reconnecting 362 Warning lamp 25, 303
Folding rearward 238
Reinstalling 361 Break-in period 264
Backrest contour
Removing 361 Bulbs, replacing 344
Adjusting 104
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 399 Additional turn signals 345
Backrest side bolsters
Bi-Xenon type* Backup lamps 345, 351
Adjusting 104
Front lamp bulbs 349 Brake lamps 345, 351
Backrest tilt
Block heater (Canada only) 291 Fog lamp, rear 345, 351
Manual seat 36
Blocking Fog lamps, front 345
Power seat* 38
Rear door window operation 75 Front lamps 345
Backup lamps
Bolts High beam flasher 345
Messages in display 323
For spare wheel 336 High beam headlamps 345
Replacing bulbs 345
408

Index
High mounted brake lamp 345 C Center console ashtray 245

License plate lamps 345, 351 CAC 399 Centigrade
Low beam headlamps 345 California Setting temperature units 135
Parking lamps, front 345, 348, 350 Important notice 11 Central locking
Parking lamps, rear 345, 351 Calling up Automatic 96
Rear lamps 345 Maintenance service indicator 293 From inside 96
Side marker lamps, front 345, 350 Range (distance to empty) 150 Locking from inside 96
Side marker lamps, rear 345, 351 CAN system 399 Switch 96
Standing lamps, front 345, 348, 350 Cargo area see Trunk Switching on/off
Standing lamps, rear 345, 351 Cargo tie-down rings* 240 (control system) 145
Tail lamp unit 351 Catalytic converter 273 Unlocking from inside 96
Tail lamps 345, 351 CD changer* 201 Central locking switch 96
Turn signal lamps, CD changer* operation 203 Central unlocking
front 345, 348, 350 CD player* Switch 96
Turn signal lamps, Operating 129 Unlocking from inside 96
rear 345, 351 CD* operation 201 Central unlocking switch 96
Button Center console 27 Certification label 376
Audio system 186 Front passenger front air bag off Changing
indicator lamp 27, 63, 70, 308 Batteries (SmartKey) 343
Lower part 28 CDs 201
Upper part 27 Changing key setting 147
409

Index
Charging Hard plastic trim items 299 Tilt/sliding sunroof* 227

Vehicle battery 361 Headlamps 168 Tilt/sliding sunroof*
Checking Headliner and shelf below in an emergency 341
Brake fluid 277 rear window 299 Tilt/sliding sunroof*
Coolant level 277, 283 Instrument cluster 298 with SmartKey 229
Engine oil level 277, 280 Leather upholstery 299 Trunk lid 94
Tire inflation pressure 277 Light alloy wheels 298 Windows 223, 224
Vehicle lighting 277 MB Tex upholstery 300 Windows with SmartKey 225
Washer reservoir level 277 Plastic and rubber parts 300 Cloth upholstery
Child safety 67 Seat belts 299 Cleaning 300
Air bags 60 Steering wheel 299 Cockpit 22, 399
Infant and child restraint Upholstery 299 Cockpit Management and
systems 64, 67 Windows 298 Data System see COMAND*
LATCH-type child seat anchors 73 Windshield 52 Collapsible tire 383
Child safety switch see Wiper blades 298 Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only) 334
Blocking of rear door window operation Wood trims 300 Collapsible wheel chock 332
Child seat anchors see Climate control 174 COMAND* 400
LATCH-type child seat anchors Clock 25, 121, 137, 138 COMAND* see separate
Cigarette lighter 246 Closing operating instructions
Cleaning Cup holder, in rear seat armrest 245 Combination switch 113
Cloth upholstery 300 Glove box 241 High beam flasher 50
Cup holders 299 Hood 279 Turn signals 50
Gear selector lever 299 Windshield wipers 51
410

Index
Consumer information 397 Submenus 123, 125 Coolant level

Control and operation TEL* menu 150 Checking 277, 283
of radio transmitters 272 Trip computer menu 148 Coolant temperature gauge 25
Control system 121, 400 Vehicle status Coolants 394
AUDIO menu 127 message memory menu 130 Cruise control 231, 400
Convenience submenu 146 Vehicle submenu 145 Canceling 232
Display digital speedometer 127 Controller Area Network see CAN system Driving downhill 232
Display outside temperature 127 Convenience submenu 146 Driving uphill 232
Functions 122, 125 Activating easy-entry/exit Fine adjustment 233
Instrument cluster feature* 146 Message in display 319
submenu 135, 137 Setting key dependency 147 Setting current speed 232
Lighting submenu 141 Setting parking position* for Setting speeds 233
Menus 124, 125 exterior rear view mirror 148 Cruise control lever 231
Multifunction display 121 Coolant 283 Cruising range, fuel 393
Multifunction steering wheel 122 Adding 283 Cup holder
NAV* menu 130 Anticorrosion/antifreeze In rear seat armrest 244
Selecting radio system 128 quantity 394 Cup holders
Selecting satellite radio* system 128 Capacities 387, 388 Cleaning 299
Settings menu 132 Checking level 283 In front of seat armrest 243
Standard display menu 126 Messages in display 316–318 Customer Assistance Center see CAC
Submenu Time/Date 137 Temperature 274
Temperature gauge 118
411

Index
D ESP 80 Difficulties
Date (day) Exterior lamps 110 While driving see
Setting 140 Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 143 Problems while driving
Date (month) Hazard warning flasher 114 With starting 47
Setting 139 Headlamps 55 Digital clock 121
Date (year) Immobilizer 83 Digital speedometer 127
Setting 141 Interior lighting delayed shut-off 145 Direction of rotation (tires) 287
Daytime running lamp mode 111 Manual shift program Discharged battery
Setting 142 (C 55 AMG only) 167 Jump starting 363
Deactivating Rear window defroster 173 Disconnecting
Air conditioning (cooling) 181 Seat heating* 105 Vehicle battery 361
Air recirculation mode 180 Tow-away alarm* 85 Display
Alarm 84 Deep water see Standing water Messages in display 319
Anti-theft alarm system* 84 Defogging Display elements
Central locking (control system) 145 Windshield 178 Audio system 184
Climate control 175 Defrosting 178 Displays
Climate control system 177 Delayed shut-off Digital speedometer 127
Cruise control 232 Exterior lamps 143 Maintenance service indicator 292
Defrosting 179 Interior lighting 145 Outside temperature 127
Engine with the SmartKey 56 Dialing Selecting display for
A number (telephone*) 152 status indicator 136
Showing vehicle status
messages 131
412

Index
Symbol messages 314 Driving E

Text messages 310 Driving abroad 272 Easy-entry/exit feature* 98
Vehicle status messages 309 General instructions 43, 265 Activating 146
Distance to empty (range) Hydroplaning 268 Electrical fuses 369
Calling up 150 In winter 270 Electrical outlet in
Door control panel 30 Problems 53 rear passenger compartment 247
Door entry lamps 116 Safety systems 77 Electrical system
Door handle 92 Through standing water 271 Technical data 384
Door unlock Driving abroad 272 Electronic Stability Program see ESP
With Tele Aid* 255 Driving instructions 265 Emergency call
Doors Driving off 267 911 221
Message in display 319 Driving safety systems Emergency call system* 249
Opening from inside vehicle 92 4MATIC 82 Emergency calls
Opening from the outside 89 ABS 77 Initiating an emergency call 251
Downhill driving BAS 78 With Tele Aid* 250
Cruise control 232 ESP 79 Emergency operation
Downshifting 158 Driving systems 231 (Limp Home Mode) 167
Manual transmission 155 Cruise control 231 Emergency operations
Drink holder see Cup holders Driving safety systems 77 Closing power tilt/sliding
Drinking and driving 265 sunroof* 341
Locking the vehicle 338
Opening power tilt/sliding
sunroof* 341
413

Index
Releasing trunk lid from inside 95 Engine compartment 278 Engine oil level
Remote door unlock 255 Fuse box in 370 Checking 277, 280
Unlocking the vehicle 337 Hood 278 Engine oils 390
Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Engine malfunction ESP 79, 400
Emission control 273 indicator lamp 25, 304 Four wheel electronic traction
Emission control information label 376 Engine number 376, 400 system with ESP 82
Ending Engine oil 279 Messages in display 312–313
A call (telephone*) 152 Adding 281 Switching off 80
Engine Additives 390 Switching on 81
Compartment 278 Checking level 277, 280 Warning lamp 25, 306
Starting with automatic Consumption 279 ETD 67, 400
transmission* 47 Display messages 280, 320–321 Safety guidelines 62
Starting with manual Filler neck, Ethanol fuel
transmission 46 C 230 Kompressor At the gas station 275
Starting with the SmartKey, (all models) 282 Requirements 392
automatic transmission* 47 Filler neck, Switching fuels 393
Starting with the SmartKey, C 240 (all models), Exterior lamp switch 49, 109
manual transmission 46 C 320 (all models), Exterior lamps
Technical data 378 C 55 AMG 282 Delayed shut-off 143
Turning off with the SmartKey 56 Messages in display 280, 320–321 Exterior rear view mirrors
Engine cleaning 297 Viscosity 400 Adjusting 41
Parking position* for 148
414

Index
F Fog lamp, rear Front seat head restraints

Fahrenheit Message in display 325 Installing, manual seat 100
Setting temperature units 135 Replacing bulb 345 Installing, power seat* 101
Fastening the seat belts 43 Switching on 113 Manual seat 100
Filler neck Fog lamps, front Power seat* 100
C 230 Kompressor Messages in display 323 Removing, manual seat 100
(all models) 282 Replacing bulbs 345 Removing, power seat* 100
C 240 (all models), C 320 (all models), Switching on 112 Front seats
C 55 AMG 282 Four wheel electronic traction Heating* 105
Fine adjustment system (4MATIC) with ESP 82 FSS (Flexible Service System)
Cruise control 233 4MATIC 82 (Canada vehicles) 292, 400
First aid kit 329 Front air bags 63 Fuel 276
Flat tire 353 Front fog lamps Additives 392
Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only) 334 Indicator lamp 109 Cruising range 393
Lowering the vehicle 359 Switching on 112 E85 (Ethanol fuel) 393
Minispare wheel Front lamps Fuel reserve warning lamp 307
(except C 55 AMG) 333 Bi-Xenon* type 349 Gasoline additives 392
Mounting the spare wheel 353 Halogen-type 347 Premium unleaded
Preparing the vehicle 353 Messages in display 323–326 gasoline 276, 388, 391
Flexible fuel vehicles 392 Replacing bulbs 345, 347 Requirements 391, 392
At the gas station 275 Switching on 109 Switching (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) 393
Switching fuels 393 Front passenger front air bag off Technical data 387, 388
Flexible Service System see FSS indicator lamp 27, 63, 70, 308 Fuel additives 392
415

Index
Fuel cap Fuse box Gear range limit

Message in display 305, 322 In engine compartment 370 Canceling 158
Fuel consumption statistics In trunk 371 Gear selector lever 47, 156
After start 149 Fuse chart 369 Cleaning 299
Since last reset 149 Fuse extractor 369, 371 Lock 47
Fuel filler flap 275 Fuses 369 Position (Automatic
Locking 275 Aids for changing fuses 369 transmission*) 121, 160
Opening in an emergency 339 Fuse box in engine compartment 370 Position (automatic
Unlocking 275 Fuse box in trunk 371 transmission*) 156
Fuel gauge 25 Fuse chart 369 Gearshift lever 46, 155
Fuel requirements 391 Fuse extractor 369, 371 Global
For ethanol fuel 392 Main fuse box in Locking 89
Fuel reserve passenger compartment 370 Unlocking 89
Warning lamp 25 Spare fuses 369 Global Positioning System see GPS
Fuel tank Glove box 241
G
Capacity 388 Closing 241
Garage door opener* 256
Filler flap 275 Locking 241
Gasoline additives 392
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Opening 241
Gasoline see Fuel
Capacities 387 Unlocking 241
Gear range 400
Functions (control system) 122, 125 Good visibility 168
Automatic transmission* 159
Resetting 133 GPS 400
Limiting 159
Shifting into optimal 158
416

Index
H Headlamps High beam flasher 50, 113

Halogen-type Automatic control 110 High beam headlamps
Front lamp bulbs 347 Bi-Xenon* 399 Indicator lamp 25
Hands-free microphone 29 Bi-Xenon* type Messages in display 324
Hard plastic trim items Replacing bulbs 349 Replacing bulbs 345, 348
Cleaning 299 Cleaning 297 Switching on 50, 113
Hazard warning flasher 114 Cleaning system* 168, 285, 396 High beam headlamps xenon type*
Switching off 114 Halogen-type, replacing bulbs 347 Replacing bulbs 349
Switching on 114 Refilling washer fluid 285 High mounted brake lamp 345
Head restraints 99 Switching off 55 Hood 278
Front seats, manual seat 100 Switching on 49 Closing 279
Front seats, power seat* 100 Washer fluid 396 Message in display 322
Manual seat 37 Headliner and shelf below rear window Opening 278
Power seat* 38 Cleaning 299 Horn 23
Rear seats 101 Heated seats* 105 Hydroplaning 268
Head unit Height adjustment
I
Time synchronization* with 137 Head restraints, manual seat 37
Identification labels 376
Headlamp cleaning system* 285 Head restraints, power seat* 38
Certification label 376
Headlamp shut-off delay see Rear seat head restraints 101
Emission control
Delayed shut-off, exterior lamps Seat belts 45
information label 376
Steering wheel,
Vacuum line routing
electrical* adjustment 40
diagram label 376
Steering wheel,
Vehicle Identification Number 376
manual adjustment 40
417

Index
Ignition 33 Instrument cluster 24, 117, 401 Interior storage spaces 241
Switching on, Cleaning 298 Armrest 242
automatic transmission* 47 Coolant temperature gauge 118 Cup holder in rear seat armrest 244
Switching on, Illumination 117 Cup holders in front of
manual transmission 46 Lamps in 302–307 seat armrest 243
Immobilizer 83 Multifunction display 121 Glove box 241
Activating 83 Outside temperature indicator 119 Parcel net in
Deactivating 83 Selecting language 136 front passenger footwell 245
Indicator lamps see Instrument lighting 117 Intermittent wiping 52
Lamps, indicator and warning Instruments and controls see Cockpit
J
Infant and child restraint systems 67 Interior lighting 115
Jack 329
Installing 72 Activating automatic control 115
Jump starting 363
LATCH-type child seat anchors 73 Deactivating automatic control 115
Information Delayed shut-off 145 K
About service and warranty 10 Manual operation 115 Key 191
Inside door handle 92 Interior rear view mirror Key dependency memory
Installing Adjusting 41 Settings 147
Infant and child restraint systems 72 Antiglare 168 Key positions in starter switch 33
Ski sack* (Canada only) 237 Key, mechanical 337
Towing eye bolt 368
Wiper blades 352
418

Index
Key, SmartKey L Instrument cluster 302–307

Battery check lamp 89 Labels, identification 376 Low beam headlamps 25
Checking the batteries 91 Lamp bulbs, exterior 344 Maintenance service indicator 292
Factory setting 89 Lamp sensor Rear fog lamp 109
Global locking 89 Message in display 324 Seat belt telltale 25, 307
Global unlocking 89 Lamps, exterior SRS 25, 59, 307
Loss of 91 Front 345 Turn signals 25
Messages in display 322 Light sensor 324 Language
Positions in starter switch 33 Messages in display 323–326 Multifunction display 136
Remote control 88 Rear 345 Setting 136
Restoring to factory setting 90 Lamps, indicator and warning LATCH-type child seat anchors 73
Selective setting 89 ABS 25, 302 Folding back 74
Starting the engine, Battery (SmartKey) 89 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 377
automatic transmission* 47 Brakes 25, 303 Leather upholstery
Starting the engine, Engine diagnostics 304, 307 Cleaning 299
manual transmission 46 Engine malfunction 25, 304–305 Lever for voice control system* 23
Turning off the engine 56 ESP 25, 306 License plate lamps
Unlocking the trunk lid 91 Front fog lamps 109 Messages in display 324
Unlocking with 32 Front passenger Replacing bulbs 345
Kickdown 163, 401 front air bag off 27, 63, 70, 308 Light alloy wheels
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 135 Fuel reserve 25, 307 Cleaning 298
Km/h or mph in speedometer 135 High beam headlamps 25 Technical data 381, 382
419

Index
Light sensor 324 Limiting the gear range 159 Lowering

Lighter see Cigarette lighter Limp Home Mode 167 Vehicle 359
Lighting 109 Loading 234 Lubricants
Automatic headlamp mode 110 Cargo tie-down rings* 240 Technical data 387
Combination switch 113 Instructions 239
M
Daytime running lamp mode 111 Roof rack* 234
Main dimensions 385
Door entry lamps 116 Split rear bench seat* 237
Main fuse box
Exterior lamp switch 109 Locator lighting 112
In passenger compartment 370
Front fog lamps 112 Setting 143
Mainodometer 121
High beams 113 Lock button 401
Maintenance 12, 292
Instrument cluster illumination 117 Locking 54, 88
Vehicles with E85 fuel 393
Instruments 117 Automatic while driving 96
Maintenance service
Interior 115 Centrally from inside 96
Calling up the maintenance
Locator lighting 112 Fuel filler flap 275
service indicator 293
Low beam 109 Global, SmartKey 89
Major service (Service B) 292
Manual headlamp mode 110 Glove box 241
Minor service (Service A) 292
Night security illumination 112 Vehicle in an emergency 338
Overdue 293
Parking lamps 109 Loss of keys 91
Types 293
Rear fog lamp 113 Loss of Service and Warranty
When due 292
Settings (control system) 141 Information Booklet 375
Maintenance service indicator 292
Standing lamps 109 Low beam headlamps
Calling up 293, 294
Trunk lamp 116 Indicator lamp 25
Clearing 293, 294
Messages in display 324–325
Maintenance System
Replacing bulbs 345, 347
(U.S. vehicles) 292, 401
Switching on 49
420

Index
Manual headlamp mode 110 Manual shift program (C 55 AMG only) Menus 122
Manual operation Activating 166 AUDIO 127
Interior lighting control 115 Automatic transmission* 165 In control system 124, 125
Manual operations Deactivating 167 NAV* 130
Fuel filler flap 339 Manual transmission 154 Settings menu 132
Locking the vehicle 338 Gearshift lever 46, 155 Standard display 126
Tilt/sliding sunroof* 341 Shifting into reverse 155 Submenus 123
Unlocking the driver’s door 337 Starting with 46 TEL* 150
Unlocking the trunk 338 MB Tex upholstery Trip computer 148
Unlocking transmission Cleaning 300 Vehicle status message memory 130
gear selector lever 340 Mechanical key 337 Microphone
Manual seat Memory Hands-free microphone 29
Adjusting 36 TV station 200 Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Adjusting backrest tilt 36 Memory function* 106, 401 Setting 135
Adjusting head restraint height 37 Recalling positions from Minispare wheel 383
Adjusting head restraint tilt 37 memory 107 Minispare wheel (except C 55 AMG) 333
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36 Storing exterior rear view mirror Mirrors
Adjusting seat height 36 parking position 108 Activating exterior rear view
Front seat head restraints 100 Storing key dependent settings 107 mirror parking position* 170
Seat fore and aft adjustment 36 Adjusting 41
Automatic antiglare*
for interior mirror 169
421

Index
Automatic antiglare* Coolant 316–318 N

for rear view mirror 169 Cruise control 319 Navigation system*
Exterior rear view mirror 41 Display 319 Operating 130
Exterior rear view mirror Doors 319 See separate COMAND*
parking position* 148 Engine oil 320–321 operating instructions
Interior rear view mirror 41 ESP 312–313 Night security illumination 112
Storing exterior rear view mirror Fuel cap 305, 322 Setting 143
parking position* 108 Hood 322
O
MON 276, 401 Key, SmartKey 322
Occupant safety 58
Motor Octane Number see MON Lamps, exterior 323–326
Air bags 59
Mph or km/h in speedometer 135 Oil 320–321
Children and air bags 60
Multicontour seats* 104 Parking brake 315
Children in the vehicle 67
Multifunction display 121, 401 Restraint system 313
Fastening the seat belt 43
Displaying gear range 159 Seat belt system 327
Infant and child restraint systems 67
Selecting language 136 SRS 313
LATCH-type child seat anchors 73
Setting date (day) 140 Steering gear oil level 327
Seat belts 43, 62
Setting date (month) 139 Tele Aid* 328
Odometer, main 121
Setting date (year) 141 Telephone* 328
Oil
Multifunction display messages Tilt/sliding sunroof* 328
Adding 281
ABS 310 Trunk lid 328
Oil level see Engine oil level
BAS 311 Windshield washer fluid 328
Oil see Engine oil
Brake fluid 315 Multifunction steering
Brake pads 315 wheel 26, 122, 401
Buttons 122
422

Index
One-touch gearshifting 158 Operating P

Canceling gear range limit 158 Audio system 183 Paintwork 296
Downshifting 158 CD player* 129 Panic alarm* 76
Upshifting 158 COMAND* see separate Panic button on SmartKey 76
Opening operating instructions Parcel net
Cup holder, in rear seat armrest 245 Navigation system* 130 In front passenger footwell 245
Doors from the inside 92 Radio 128 Parking 54, 267
Fuel filler flap 276 Radio transmitters 272 Parking brake 48, 54
Fuel filler flap manually 339 Satellite radio* 128 Engaging 54
Glove box 241 Telephone* 150, 183, 208 Message in display 315
Hood 278 Vehicle outside the Releasing 48
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* USA and Canada 13 Parking lamps
in an emergency 341 Operating safety Messages in display 325
Side windows 223 Audio system 183 Parking lamps, front
Tilt/sliding sunroof* 227, 341 Operator’s Manual 10 Replacing bulbs 345
Tilt/sliding sunroof* Ornamental moldings 297 Parking lamps, rear
with SmartKey 229 Outer seats Replacing bulbs 345
Trunk 91 Rear seat head restraints 101, 103 Parking position*
Trunk from the inside 93 Outside temperature 127 Exterior rear view
Trunk from the outside 92 Outside temperature indicator 119 mirrors 108, 148, 170
Windows 223 Overdue maintenance service 293 Parts service 374
Windows with SmartKey 225 Overhead control panel 29
Overspeed range 401
423

Index
Passenger compartment 272 Poly-V-belt drive 401 Power windows 223

Interior lighting 115 Layout 377 Blocking of rear door
Interior rear view mirror 41 Positions (Memory function*) window operation 75
Main fuse box in 370 Recalling from memory 107 Side windows 223
Parcel net in front passenger Storing into memory 107 Synchronizing 226
footwell 245 Power assistance 265 Practical hints
Passenger safety see Occupant safety Power seat* Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only) 334
Pedals 265 Adjusting backrest tilt 38 Collapsible wheel chock 332
Performance Adjusting head restraint height 38 First aid kit 329
In cold weather 393 Adjusting head restraint tilt 39 Fuses 369
In hot weather 393 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 38 Lamp in center console 308
Phone book* Adjusting seat height 38 Lamps in instrument cluster 302
Loading 152 Memory function* 106 Minispare wheel
Quick search 153 Removing/installing front (except C 55 AMG) 333
Phone number* head restraints 100 Spare wheel bolts 336
Dialing 152 Seat fore and aft adjustment 38 Symbol messages 314
Redialing 153 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 227 Text messages 310
Plastic and rubber parts Power train 402 Towing the vehicle 365
Cleaning 300 Power washer 296 Vehicle jack 329, 331
Playing Vehicle status messages
CDs 204 in the display 309
Vehicle tool kit 329
424

Index
Premium unleaded gasoline 391 Range (distance to empty) Rear seat head restraints 101
Problems Calling up 150 Adjusting 101
While driving 53 Reading lamp 115 Adjusting tilt 103
With vehicle 17 Rear bench seat Folding back, electrical 102
Product information 9 Foldable* 237 Folding back, manual 102
Program mode 121 Rear door window Installing 103
Program mode selector switch 402 Blocking operation 75 Outer seats 103
Automatic shift program, Rear fog lamp 345 Placing upright 102
automatic transmission* 162 Bulb 345 Removing 103
Manual shift program (C 55 AMG only), Indicator lamp 109 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
automatic transmission* 166 Switching on 113 Rear window defroster 173
Rear lamp bulbs Rear window sunshade* 172
Q
Replacing 351 Reconnecting
Quick search
Rear lamps Vehicle battery 362
Phone book* 153
Messages in display 323–326 Recovery services
R Rear lamps see Tail lamps For stolen vehicle 256
Radio Rear outer seats Refrigerant
Selecting stations 128 Adjusting head restraint height 101 Air conditioning 390
Radio operation 191 Rear passenger compartment, Refueling 275
Radio see Radio operation adjustable air vents 182 Regular checks 277
Radio transmitters, control and Rear seat ashtray 246 Reinstalling vehicle battery 361
operation 272 Remote control
SmartKey 88
425

Index
Remote door unlock Parking lamp bulbs, rear 351 REST 402
With Tele Aid* 255 Rear lamp bulbs 345, 351 Restraint system
Removing Side marker lamp bulbs, front 350 Message in display 313
Ski sack* (Canada only) 237 Side marker lamp bulbs, rear 351 Restraint system see Infant and
Vehicle battery 361 Standing lamp bulbs, front 348, 350 child restraint systems
Vehicle tool kit Standing lamp bulbs, rear 351 Reverse (manual transmission)
(C 55 AMG only) 330 Tail lamp bulbs 351 Shifting into 155
Vehicle tool kit Turn signal lamp bulbs, Rims 380
(except C 55 AMG) 329 front 348, 350 Roadside Assistance 12
Wheel 355 Turn signal lamp bulbs, RON 276, 402
Wiper blades 352 rear 351 Roof rack* 234
Replacing Wiper blades 352 Rubber parts
Backup lamp bulbs 351 Reporting Cleaning 300
Brake lamp bulbs 351 Safety defects 18
S
Bulbs 344 Research Octane Number see RON
Safety
Fog lamp bulb, rear 351 Reset button in the
Occupant 58
Front lamp bulbs 345, 347 instrument cluster 117, 132, 133
Safety belts see Seat belts
Fuses 369 Resetting
Safety defects
High beam bulbs 348 All functions (control system) 132
Reporting 18
High beam bulbs All functions of a submenu 133
Safety systems
(xenon-type* headlamps) 349 Fuel consumption 150
Driving 77
License plate lamp bulbs 351 Maintenance service indicator 294
Low beam bulbs 347 Trip odometer 119
Parking lamp bulbs, front 348, 350
426

Index
Satellite radio Seat heating* Self-test

additional text information 200 Switching off 105 BabySmartTM air bag
general information 196 Switching on 105 deactivation system 70
manual channel input 198 Seats 98 Tele Aid* 249
storing of station 200 Adjusting 35 Service
Seat belt force limiter 67 Easy entry/exit feature* 98 Parts 374
Seat belt height adjustment 45 Heating* 105 Service and Warranty Booklet
Seat belt height adjustment, Manual seat 36 Loss of 375
front seats 45 Multicontour seat* 104 Service and warranty information 10
Seat belt system Power seat* 38 Service life (tires) 287
Message in display 327 Split rear bench seat* 237 Service see Maintenance
Seat belt telltale 25 Securing cargo Service System see FSS
Seat belts 64 Cargo tie-down rings* 240 Setting
Cleaning 299 Selecting Convenience functions 146
Fastening 43 Automatic time change Cruise control 232
Height adjustment 45 (Daylight Saving Time Date (day) 140
Proper use of 45, 66 (DST) summer/winter) 139 Date (month) 139
Safety guidelines 62 Display for status indicator 136 Date (year) 141
Telltale 307 station (satellite radio) 198 Daytime running lamp mode 142
Seat cushion depth Selecting radio mode 191 Exterior rear view mirror
Adjusting 104 Selector lever see gear selector lever parking position* 108
Higher speed in cruise control 233
Hours (clock) 137
427

Index
Individual vehicle settings 132 Setting current speed 232 Side impact air bags 64
Instrument lighting 117 Setting the temperature 177 Side marker lamps, front
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 145 Settings Messages in display 323
Key dependent memory 147 Convenience functions 146 Replacing bulbs 345
Lamps and lighting Factory, SmartKey 89 Side marker lamps, rear
(control system) 141 Individual, SmartKey 147 Replacing bulbs 345
Language, multifunction display 136 Lighting (control system) 141 Side markers
Locator lighting 143 Menus and submenus 123 Cleaning 297
Lower speed in cruise control 233 Resetting all (control system) 132 Side windows
Miles/kilometers in Resetting in the submenu 133 Automatic opening 224
speedometer 135 Selective, SmartKey 89 Cleaning 298
Minutes (clock) 138 Settings menu Closing 223, 224, 225
Night security illumination 143 Functions in 132 Closing fully 224
Parking position* for exterior Individual vehicle settings 132 Closing with SmartKey 225
rear view mirrors 148 Submenus 133 Opening 223, 224, 225
Radio station 198 Shift lock 402 Opening fully 224
Speed in cruise control 233 Shift program mode 121 Opening with SmartKey 225
Speedometer display mode 135 Shifting Stopping 225
Temperature (Interior) 177 Gear selector lever 47, 156 Synchronizing power windows 226
Temperature indicator 135 Gear selector lever positions 160 Simultaneous wiping and washing
Time display mode (Clock) 139 Gearshift lever 46, 155 Windshield wipers 52
Units Into optimal gear range Single CD mode selector 185
Speedometer 135 (automatic transmission*) 158 Single wipe 52
Temperature 135 Into reverse
(Manual transmission) 155
428

Index
Ski sack* (Canada only) 234 Spare fuses 369 Starting difficulties 47
Installing 237 Spare wheel 383 Starting position 33
Removing 237 Bolts 336 Starting the engine 46
Unfolding and loading 234 Mounting 353 Station (satellite radio)
Unloading and folding 236 Speed selecting 198
Sliding in Setting current 232 Steering column
Swiveling cup holder, Speed settings Height adjustment, electrical* 41
in front of seat armrest 244 Cruise control 233 Height adjustment, manual 40
Sliding out Speedometer 25 Length adjustment, electrical* 41
Swiveling cup holder, Settings units 135 Length adjustment, manual 40
in front of seat armrest 243 Speedometer display mode Steering gear oil
SmartKey 88 Selecting 135 Message in display 327
Changing batteries 343 Split rear bench seat* 237 Steering wheel
Locking and unlocking 88 SRS 66, 402 Adjusting 39
Opening and closing the Indicator lamp 25, 307 Buttons 26
tilt/sliding sunroof* with 229 Message in display 313 Cleaning 299
Opening and closing the Standing lamps, front Electrical adjustment* 40
windows with 225 Replacing bulbs 345 Manual adjustment 40
Unlocking with 32 Standing lamps, rear Steering wheel gearshift control
Snow chains 291 Replacing bulbs 345 (C 55 AMG only)
Soft keys Standing water Automatic transmission* 164
Audio system 186 Driving instructions 271 Stolen vehicle
Sound system* 188 Starter switch 23, 33 Recovery services 256
Positions 33
429

Index
Stopping Substitute lamps Front fog lamps 112

Tilt/sliding sunroof* 229 Bulbs 344 Hazard warning flasher 114
Windows 225 Sun visors 171 Headlamps 49
Storage compartments Sunshade* 172 High beam headlamps 50
Glove box 241 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS High beams 113
Storage spaces Switching Low beam headlamps 49
Cup holder in rear seat armrest 244 Fuel (Flexible fuel vehicle) 393 Rear fog lamp 113
Cup holders in front of Switching off Seat heating* 105
seat armrest 243 Audio system 186 Windshield wipers 51
Storing Automatic central locking Symbols 15
station (satellite radio) 200 (control system) 145 Synchronizing
Storing (Memory function*) Delayed (exterior lamps) 143 Power windows 226
Positions into memory 107 Engine 56 Tilt/sliding sunroof* 230
Submenus ESP 80
T
Convenience 146 Hazard warning flasher 114
Tachometer 25, 119
For settings 123 Headlamps 55
Overspeed range 119
In control system 125 Seat heating* 105
Tail lamps
Instrument cluster 135, 137 Switching on
Cleaning 297
Lighting 141 Audio system 186
Messages in display 325
Resetting functions in Automatic central locking
Replacing bulbs 345, 351
Control system 133 (control system) 145
Tar stains 296
Selecting 133 ESP 81
Settings menu 133
Time/Date 137
Vehicle 145
430

Index
Technical data Tele Aid* 248 Loading phone book 152

Air conditioning refrigerant 390 Emergency calls 250 Message in display 328
Brake fluid 390 Hands-free microphone 29 Operation 150, 208
Coolant 387, 388 Information 253 Redialing 153
Coolants 394 Initiating an emergency Temperature
Electrical system 384 call manually 251 Display mode 135
Engine 378 Message in display 328 Grades of tires 398
Engine oil additives 390 Remote door unlock 255 Setting interior temperature 177
Engine oils 390 Roadside Assistance 252 Setting units in display 135
Flexible fuel vehicles 392 SOS button 251 Tires 288
Fuel requirements 391 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Tie-down rings* (Trunk) 240
Fuels 387, 388 services 256 Tightening torque
Gasoline additives 392 System self-check 249 (Wheel bolts) 359, 403
Lubricants 387 Tele Aid System 249, 403 Tilt
Main dimensions 385 Upgrade scenario 254 Head restraint, manual seat 37
Premium unleaded gasoline 391 Telematics* 403 Head restraint, power seat* 39
Rims and tires 380 Telephone* 26, 247 Tilt/sliding sunroof*
Weights 386 Answering a call 151 Closing 227, 341
Windshield washer 389 Dialing a number from Closing with SmartKey 229
Windshield washer and headlamp the phone book 152 Messages in display 328
cleaning* system 389, 396 Ending a call 152 Opening 227, 341
Hands-free microphone 29 Opening with SmartKey 229
Stopping 229
Synchronizing 230
431

Index
Time Traction 397 Tread depth (tires) 290

Setting hours 137 Tread depth 290 Tread Wear 397
Setting minutes 138 Wear pattern 289 Trip computer 148
Time display Winter 290 Trip odometer
Setting 139 Tools 329 Resetting 119
Time synchronization* Tow away alarm* Trunk
With head unit 137 Canceling alarm 86 Closing the lid 94
Tire inflation pressure Tow-away alarm* 85 Fuse box in 371
Checking 277, 287 Arming 85 Lamp 116
Tire speed rating 269, 403 Disarming 85 Opening 91
Tire traction 269 Disarming for transport 85 Opening from inside vehicle 93
Tires 286, 380 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) Opening from outside vehicle 92
Consumer information 397 Installing 368 Tie-down rings 240
Direction of rotation 287 Towing the vehicle 365 Trunk lid emergency release 95
Driving instructions 268 Traction 162, 403 Trunk lid
Retreads 286 Traction (Tires) 397 Closing 94
Rims and tires 380 Transmission gear selector lever Emergency release 95
Rotating 289 Unlocking manually 340 Message in display 328
Service life 287 Transmission see Turn signal lamps, front
Temperature 288 Automatic* or Manual transmission Messages in display 326
Temperature grades 398 Traveling abroad 272 Replacing bulbs 345
432

Index
Turn signal lamps, in mirrors U Upshifting 158

Messages in display 326 Units Useful features 241
Turn signal lamps, rear Setting speedometer units 135 Ashtrays 245
Messages in display 326 Setting temperature units 135 Cigarette lighter 246
Replacing bulbs 345 Unlocking 32, 88 Electrical outlet 247
Turn signals 50 Centrally from inside 96 Interior storage spaces 241
Additional in mirrors 345 Driver’s door in an emergency 337 Tele Aid* 248
Cleaning lenses 297 Fuel filler flap 275 Telephone* 247
Front bulbs 345 Global 89
V
Indicator lamps 25 Glove box 241
Vacuum line routing diagram label 376
Rear bulbs 345 In an emergency 337
Vehicle
Turning inward Selective settings 89
Individual settings 132, 134
Swiveling cup holder, Transmission gear selector
Locking 97
in front of seat armrest 244 lever manually 340
Locking in an emergency 338
Turning off Trunk in an emergency 338
Lowering 359
Engine 56 Vehicle in an emergency 255
Performance in cold weather 393
Turning outward With the SmartKey 32
Performance in hot weather 393
Swiveling cup holder, Upgrade scenario
Service battery 360
in front of seat armrest 244 Tele Aid* 254
Towing 365
Uphill driving
Unlocking 97
Cruise control 232
Unlocking in an emergency 337
Upholstery
With flexible fuel 392
Cleaning 299
433

Index
Vehicle battery 360 Tail lamps 297 Vehicle tool kit 329
Vehicle care 295 Tar stains 296 Alignment bolt 329
Cloth upholstery 300 Turn signals 297 Collapsible wheel chock 329
Cup holders 299 Upholstery 299 Gloves 329
Engine cleaning 297 Vehicle washing 297 Jack 329
Gear selector lever 299 Window cleaning 298 Protective wrap (C 55 AMG only) 329
Hard plastic trim items 299 Wiper blades 298 Removing (C 55 AMG only) 330
Headlamps 297 Wood trims 300 Removing (except C 55 AMG) 329
Instrument cluster 298 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Spare fuses 329
Leather upholstery 299 Vehicle jack 331 Spare wheel bolts 329
Light alloy wheels 298 Vehicle lighting Towing eye bolt 329
MB Tex upholstery 300 Checking 277 Valve extractor
Ornamental moldings 297 Vehicle status message memory 130 (C 55 AMG only) 329, 331
Paintwork 296 Calling up 130 Vehicle jack 329
Plastic and rubber parts 300 Clearing 131 Wheel wrench 329
Power washer 296 Vehicle status messages Vehicle washing 297
Seat belts 299 Displaying 131 VIN 376, 403
Side markers 297 Voice control system* 403
Steering wheel 299 Hands-free microphone 29
434

Index
W Windshield Winter driving 290

Warning lamps see Defogging 178 Block heater (Canada only) 291
Lamps, indicator and warning Refilling washer fluid 285 Snow chains 291
Warning sounds Replacing wiper blades 352 Tires 290
Drivers seat belts 64 Washer fluid 285, 396 Winter driving instructions 270
Parking brake 48 Washer system 396 Winter tires 290
Warranty coverage 375 Windshield washer fluid 396 Wiper blades
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Message in display 328 Cleaning 298
Washer reservoir level Mixing ratio 396 Installing 352
Checking 277 Refilling 285 Removing 352
Washing the vehicle 295 Wiping with 52 Replacing 352
Wear pattern (tires) 289 Windshield washer system 396 Wiping
Weights 386 Windshield wipers 51 With windshield washer fluid 52
Wheel bolts 336 Fast wiper speed 51 Wood trims
Wheel change Intermittent wiping 52 Cleaning 300
Tightening torque 359 Replacing wiper blades 352
X
Wheels Single wipe 52
Xenon headlamps
Tires and wheels 286 Switching on 51
Bi-Xenon* 399
Window curtain air bags 64 Wiping with
Windows see Side windows windshield washer fluid 52
435

436

Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2840-31
Press time 03/05/04
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany


Mercedes C230 Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes C230 Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started ................................... 31

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Lighting ............................................. 109

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

At the gas station .............................. 275 Winter driving .................................... 290

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 342 Jump starting...................................... 363

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 387

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Proper use of the vehicle

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

For the USA only:

Reporting Safety Defects

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Item Page Item Page Item Page

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Item Page Item Page Item Page

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Item Page Item Page

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

4 Hazard warning flasher 114 a Audio system, 183

6 Switch for folding back 102 b Climate control 174

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Lower part Item Page

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey i

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Warning! G That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

컄컄 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Head restraint height Head restraint tilt

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Head restraint tilt Steering wheel

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com